6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0 - SIEMENS

SIMATIC

Automation Systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual

11/2015

A5E00172008-12

Preface

Mechanical Configuration of

an Automation System with

SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital

Modules 2

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog

Modules 3

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog

Modules 4

Certificates A

Standards and licenses B

Service & support C

Legal information

Warning notice system

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent

damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert

symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are

graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER

indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING

indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION

indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE

indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be

used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property

damage.

Qualified Personnel

The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific

task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified

personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding

potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:

WARNING

Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical

documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or

approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and

maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible

ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks

All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication

may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.

Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in

this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG

Division Process Industries and Drives

Postfach 48 48

90026 NÜRNBERG

GERMANY

A5E00172008-12

Ⓟ 06/2016 Subject to change

Preface

Purpose of the manual

This manual will help you to

● plan,

● install,

● and operate a SIMATIC S7 ex module for an automation system in a hazardous area.

Basic knowledge required

General knowledge of automation engineering is required to understand this manual.

You should be familiar with the fundamentals of explosion protection, with the identification of

explosion-protected equipment and with the regulations regarding explosion protection.

Validity of the manual

This manual is valid for all the SIMATIC S7 ex modules listed by order number in the following

table.

Table 1 S7-300 I/O modules

SIMATIC S7 ex module Order number

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR 6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA 6ES7322-5SD00-0AB0

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA 6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD 6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0

SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA 6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0

SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA 6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0

SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART 6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0

SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4…20mA HART 6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0

SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART 6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0

SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART 6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0

For information on CPUs or IM 153-x versions which support this module, refer to the STEP 7

Hardware Catalog.

Changes since the previous edition of the manual

The section below outlines the changes this manual contains compared to the previous version:

● The HART analog modules 6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0 and 6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0 have been

added.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 3

Position in the information scheme

Depending on the application, you will need the following documentation to understand this

manual:

●S7-300: Hardware and Installation, CPU data, module specifications and instruction list

●ET 200M: Distributed I/O device

●Distributed I/O Devices S7-300, M7-300, ET 200M: Manual

Guide

The manual covers the following subject areas:

● At the beginning of this manual you will find a complete table of contents.

● Chapter 1 explains the mechanical configuration of an automation system with SIMATIC

S7 Ex modules

● Chapter 2 describes the SIMATIC S7 Ex digital modules

● Chapter 3 describes the SIMATIC S7 Ex analog modules

● Chapter 4 describes the SIMATIC S7 HART analog modules

● Important terms are explained in the glossary.

● You can use the index to find the key parts of the manual.

Approvals

See Appendix Standards and approvals (Page 249)

CE marking

See Appendix Standards and approvals (Page 249)

Mark for Australia (C-Tick-Mark)

See Appendix Standards and approvals (Page 249)

Standards

See Appendix Standards and approvals (Page 249)

Recycling and disposal

You can recycle the Ex I/O modules because they are made of low-toxicity materials. To recycle

and disposal of your old device in an environmentally friendly way, please contact a company

certified to deal with electronic waste.

Preface

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

4Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Security information

Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the

secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are

important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’

products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that

you regularly check for product updates.

For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable

preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,

state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also

be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet (http://

www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific

newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet (http://

support.automation.siemens.com).

Preface

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 5

Preface

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

6Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Table of contents

Preface.........................................................................................................................................................3

1Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules..................................11

1.1 Use.........................................................................................................................................11

1.2 Fundamental Guidelines and Specifications..........................................................................11

1.3 The LK 393 line chamber.......................................................................................................14

1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules...................................................................17

1.5 Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules................................................................20

1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems..........................................................21

1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems.........................................................................................24

1.7.1 General information................................................................................................................24

1.7.2 Marking of Cables and Lines of Intrinsically Safe Circuits.....................................................26

1.7.3 Wiring and Cabling in Cable Bedding Made of Metal or in Conduits.....................................26

1.7.4 Summary of Requirements of EN 60079-14..........................................................................27

1.7.5 Selecting the cables and wires in accordance with EN 60079-14..........................................28

1.7.6 Types of cables......................................................................................................................29

1.7.7 Requirements of Terminals for Intrinsically Safe Type of Protection.....................................32

1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage.................................................33

1.8.1 Shielding................................................................................................................................33

1.8.2 Equipment Shielding..............................................................................................................33

1.8.3 Line Shielding.........................................................................................................................34

1.8.4 Measures to Counteract Interference Voltages......................................................................36

1.8.5 The Most Important Basic Rules for Ensuring EMC...............................................................38

1.9 Lightning Protection...............................................................................................................39

1.9.1 Measures...............................................................................................................................39

1.9.2 External Lightning Protection/Shielding of Buildings..............................................................40

1.9.3 Creating distributed systems with S7-300 and ET 200M.......................................................40

1.9.4 Shielding of Cables and Buildings..........................................................................................41

1.9.5 Equipotential bonding for lightning protection........................................................................41

1.9.6 Overvoltage Protection...........................................................................................................42

1.9.7 Example of Lightning and Overvoltage Protection.................................................................43

1.9.8 Lightning Strike......................................................................................................................45

1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas....................................................................................45

1.10.1 Safety Measures....................................................................................................................45

1.10.2 Use of Ex Assemblies in Hazardous Zone 2..........................................................................47

1.10.3 Use of Ex Assemblies in Hazardous Zone 1..........................................................................47

1.11 Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus......................................................................................50

2 SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules.................................................................................................................53

2.1 Chapter overview...................................................................................................................53

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)................................53

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 7

2.2.1 Features and technical specifications....................................................................................53

2.2.2 Parameterization....................................................................................................................59

2.2.3 Diagnostic messages.............................................................................................................61

2.2.4 Interrupts................................................................................................................................64

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0).......................66

2.3.1 Features and technical specifications....................................................................................66

2.3.2 Parameterization....................................................................................................................72

2.3.3 Diagnostic messages.............................................................................................................74

2.3.4 Interrupts................................................................................................................................76

2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0).......................77

2.4.1 Features and technical specifications....................................................................................77

2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules............................................................84

3 SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules................................................................................................................87

3.1 Analog value representation..................................................................................................87

3.1.1 Analog Value Representation of Analog Input and Output Values........................................87

3.1.2 General information about the display of analog values within the measuring ranges of

analog inputs..........................................................................................................................87

3.1.3 Analog value notation of the voltage measurement ranges...................................................89

3.1.4 Analog value notation of the current measurement ranges...................................................89

3.1.5 Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders..............................90

3.1.6 Analog value representation for the standard temperature range..........................................91

3.1.7 Analog value representation for the standard temperature range Ni 100..............................92

3.1.8 Analog value representation for the climatic temperature range ...........................................92

3.1.9 Analog value representation for the climatic temperature range Ni 100................................93

3.1.10 Analog value representation for the temperature range type B.............................................94

3.1.11 Analog value representation for the temperature range type E.............................................95

3.1.12 Analog value representation for the temperature range type J..............................................96

3.1.13 Analog value representation for the temperature range type K.............................................96

3.1.14 Analog value representation for the temperature range type L..............................................97

3.1.15 Analog value representation for the temperature range type N.............................................98

3.1.16 Analog value representation for the temperature range type R.............................................99

3.1.17 Analog value representation for the temperature range type S.............................................99

3.1.18 Representation of the analog values of the temperature range type T................................100

3.1.19 Analog value representation for the temperature range type U...........................................101

3.1.20 Analog Value Representation for the Output Ranges of Analog Outputs............................102

3.2 General information on wiring technology............................................................................102

3.3 Wiring transducers to analog inputs.....................................................................................103

3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD.......................106

3.5 Connection of resistance thermometers (e.g. Pt100) and resistance sensors.....................111

3.6 Using thermocouples...........................................................................................................112

3.7 Connecting voltage sensors.................................................................................................115

3.8 Wiring current transducers or measuring transducers to the analog inputs SM 331; AI

4 x 0/4...20 mA.....................................................................................................................115

3.9 Connecting Loads/Actuators to the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA....117

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules............................................................118

Table of contents

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

8Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

3.10.1 Conversion and Cycle Time of Analog Input Channels........................................................118

3.10.2 Conversion, Cycle, Transient Recovery and Response Times of Analog Output

Channels..............................................................................................................................119

3.10.3 Parameters of Analog Modules............................................................................................120

3.10.4 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules......................................................................................124

3.10.5 Interrupts of analog modules................................................................................................128

3.10.6 Characteristics of Analog Modules.......................................................................................130

3.10.7 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex analog modules........................................................132

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)........................135

3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)........................146

3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)....................154

4 SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules........................................................................................................161

4.1 Using HART analog modules...............................................................................................161

4.2 Introduction to HART............................................................................................................163

4.2.1 Definition of HART...............................................................................................................163

4.2.2 HART functions....................................................................................................................164

4.2.3 Application of HART.............................................................................................................166

4.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation.............................................................................168

4.3.1 Example configuration..........................................................................................................168

4.3.2 Setting Up the HART Analog Module and Field Devices.....................................................169

4.3.3 Operating Phase of the HART Analog Module and Field Devices.......................................170

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5.....................................................................................171

4.4.1 Parameters of HART Analog Modules.................................................................................171

4.4.2 Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules..................................................................174

4.4.3 Interrupts of the HART Analog Modules..............................................................................175

4.4.4 HART analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0) ....176

4.4.5 HART analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0)....183

4.4.6 Data record interface............................................................................................................189

4.4.6.1 Parameter Data Records.....................................................................................................190

4.4.6.2 Diagnostic data records.......................................................................................................192

4.4.6.3 HART Communication Data Records..................................................................................194

4.4.6.4 Additional diagnostic data records.......................................................................................198

4.4.6.5 Additional parameter data records.......................................................................................200

4.4.6.6 User data interface...............................................................................................................201

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7.....................................................................................203

4.5.1 Configuring HART variables.................................................................................................204

4.5.2 Parameters of HART Analog Modules.................................................................................206

4.5.3 Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules..................................................................209

4.5.4 Interrupts of the HART Analog Modules..............................................................................215

4.5.5 HART Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0)....215

4.5.6 HART Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

(6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0)......................................................................................................223

4.5.7 Data record interface............................................................................................................229

4.5.7.1 Parameter Data Records.....................................................................................................231

4.5.7.2 Diagnostic data records.......................................................................................................234

4.5.7.3 HART communication and information data records...........................................................236

4.5.7.4 Example of HART programming..........................................................................................241

4.5.7.5 User data interface...............................................................................................................243

Table of contents

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 9

A Certificates................................................................................................................................................247

A.1 Overview of diagnostic functions..........................................................................................247

B Standards and licenses............................................................................................................................249

B.1 Standards and licenses........................................................................................................249

C Service & support.....................................................................................................................................255

C.1 Service & support.................................................................................................................255

Glossary...................................................................................................................................................257

Index.........................................................................................................................................................269

Table of contents

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

10 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System

with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules 1

1.1 Use

Overview

The SIMATIC S7 Ex modules can be used in the systems:

● S7-300,

● ET 200M.

The HART analog modules SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4…20mA HART and SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA

HART can be used in the ET 200M system.

For installation purposes, you must therefore comply with the configuration guidelines as

specified in the corresponding manuals. In addition, further reference guidelines for SIMATIC

S7 Ex modules are provided in this section. These must be taken into consideration.

1.2 Fundamental Guidelines and Specifications

Note

Ex systems may only be installed by authorized personnel.

Approvals

The SIMATIC S7 Ex modules have the following approval

II 3 G (2) GD Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc. This means they can be installed in a non-

hazardous area and also in zone 2 (category 3G) if certain conditions are adhered to. Only

intrinsically safe electrical equipment (actuators/sensors) permitted in zones 1 and 2 can be

connected to the SIMATIC S7 Ex modules. The approval applies to all potentially explosive

gas mixtures in Groups IIC. The safety-related limits can be found in the certificates of

conformity.

The certificates of conformity and explanations of the designations can be found on the Internet

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200).

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 11

FM approval

The SIMATIC S7 Ex modules have the following FM approvals:

● Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;

● Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx

Therefore, the modules can be used in areas that contain volatile flammable liquids or

flammable gasses which are normally within closed vessels or systems, from which they can

only escape under abnormal operating or fault conditions. The approval applies to all test

gasses. A surface temperature no greater than 135 °C (T4) occurs at ambient temperatures

of 60 °C.

Safe extra low voltage

SIMATIC S7 Ex modules must be operated with a "safe functional extra low voltage". The

module may thus only be subject to a fault voltage of U < 60 V. You can find more detailed

information on the safe extra low voltage in, for example, the data sheets for the power supplies

to be used.

All system components which can supply electrical energy in any form whatsoever must fulfill

this condition. This includes in particular:

● the power supply module PS307. It fulfills this condition.

● the MPI interface. It fulfills this condition when all users operate with safe extra low voltage.

SIMATIC automation systems and programming units also fulfill this condition.

● 115/230 V modules. Even if they are used in another cell or in another programmable

controller they must feature safe extra low voltage on the system side (i.e. towards the

backplane bus).

Any other current circuit (24 VDC) integrated in the system must be operated with ESLV. Refer

to the corresponding data sheets or consult the manufacturer.

Note that the I/O modules also support the connection of sensors and actuators with auxiliary

power supply. Also ensure a safe extra low voltage is used in this case. The voltage level of

the process signal at a 24 V digital module may never reach a fault voltage Um > 60V. This

also applies to non-intrinsically safe components.

Note

All power sources such as the internal or external 24 VDC load voltage supplies and the 5 V

bus voltage must be appropriately interconnected galvanically, so that voltage addition as a

result of potential differences is not liable to generate a fault voltage which exceeds Um. You

can achieve this state, for example, by referencing all power sources of the system to functional

ground. Also refer to the instructions provided in the relevant manuals (see Foreword) for this

purpose. The maximum possible fault voltage Um in the system is 60V.

Minimum thread measure

A minimum thread measure of 50 mm must be maintained between connections with safe

functional extra low voltage and intrinsically safe connections. The process connector features

a cable chamber in order to meet this requirement.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.2 Fundamental Guidelines and Specifications

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

12 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Certain module components may prevent you from maintaining this thread measure. In this

case, you should install a DM 370 dummy module, and set it up so that it does not use any

address space. If you use the ET 200M Distributed I/O, you should observe the information

regarding the configuration.

Also take care with regard to the wiring to ensure this specified spacing is maintained between

intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe connections.

Combined use of Ex and non-Ex I/O modules

Combined use is possible, however, the minimum thread measure between conductive parts

of Ex and non-Ex modules must be maintained in all cases. As a rule, you must install a DM

370 spacer module between Ex and non-Ex modules. Always separate the intrinsically safe

from the non-intrinsically safe wiring. They must be routed in separate cable ducts. A mixed

operation is therefore not recommended.

Partition

The Ex partition must be fitted to achieve the minimum thread measure of 50 mm between Ex

and non-Ex modules when using the bus module of the active backplane bus.

Load current circuit

Power is supplied to the Ex sensors and actuators (to 4-wire transducers, for example) either

from the Ex modules, or via separate, intrinsically safe power supply modules.

The Ex I/O modules receive their power supply via the backplane bus. The 24VDC load voltage

input of the front connector is required for the power supply of the Ex sensors and the Ex

actuators on the majority of modules.

Connecting Ex I/O modules

The Ex I/O modules are configured in the same way as standard modules from left to right.

Wire the Ex sensors and actuators to the process connector, include any load voltage supply

using the cable chamber, and then plug the connector into the module.

Note

If necessary, a safety assessment of this intrinsically safe power circuit should be carried out

by an expert before a sensor or actuator is connected to an Ex module.

Replacing Ex I/O modules

After being plugged in for the first time, the front connector adopts the module type coding set

at the factory. This setting prevents you from unintentionally replacing the module with a

different type, i.e. the front connector's mechanical coding prevents snap-on mounting on an

incorrect module type. thus fulfilling explosion protection requirements. When replacing Ex

modules, carry out the necessary steps in the order described below:

●Configuration

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.2 Fundamental Guidelines and Specifications

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 13

1. Disconnect the L+ load voltage supply

2. Unplug the front connector

3. Remove the module

●Mounting

1. Install the module

2. Plug in the front connector

3. Connect the L+ load voltage supply

See also

Overview of diagnostic functions (Page 247)

The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14)

Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17)

Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20)

1.3 The LK 393 line chamber

Scope of application

With the exception of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, all Ex I/O modules

require a 24V DC load voltage supply via the process connector. Safety isolation of this signal

in order to maintain the minimum thread measure between Ex and non-Ex areas is achieved

by using the LK 393 line chamber (Order No. 6ES7393-4AA00-0AA0). Process signals are

carried downward while the 24V supply is routed upward in separate ducts.

When using the LK 393 line chamber, you must always use the front connector with screw-

type contacts. If you use the front connector with spring contacts, the front door of the module

can no longer be closed.

Connecting the line chamber

1. The lines of the L+ and M connections are cut to the required length, their insulation is

stripped and wire end ferrules are fitted.

2. The conductor ends with the ferrules are passed through the openings in the LK 393 line

chamber until they are flush with the fastening pins.

3. The conductors are then pressed into the guide ducts of the LK 393 line chamber and routed

upward (secure with hot-melt adhesive if necessary).

4. The line chamber pre-assembled in this way is now inserted in the terminals of the front

connector.

5. The wire end ferrules of L+ and M are screwed to the terminals 1 and 20 and the fastening

pins to terminals 2 and 19.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.3 The LK 393 line chamber

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

14 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

This ensures a firm connection of the line chamber with the front connector, thus fulfilling

explosion protection safety requirements.

The following figs.illustrate the configuration.

➀ Load voltage supply

➁ Process connector with screw-type connection

➂ Ex (i) process cables

➃ Line chamber

Image 1-1 Connecting the LK 393 line chamber

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.3 The LK 393 line chamber

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 15

L+

➀ Wire end ferrule

➁ Diameter > 2 mm

Image 1-2 Inserting the connecting cables of the load voltage in the line chamber. Outside diameter of the wires > 2 mm

(viewed from below)

L+

➀ Wire end ferrule

➁ Diameter < 2 mm

Image 1-3 Insert the L+ line in a loop in the line chamber. Outside diameter of the wires < 2 mm

(viewed from below)

Note

Use Ex I/O modules which require a 24V load voltage exclusively with the LK 393 line chamber.

It is necessary for ensuring the modules are used for their intended purpose.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.3 The LK 393 line chamber

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

16 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Image 1-4 LK 393 line chamber when connected

You can, of course, also use Ex I/O modules for non-intrinsically safe tasks. You will not need

the line chamber in this case. However, you must then clearly and permanently cancel the Ex

identification symbol. Subsequent use for Ex applications is no longer possible unless you

return the module to the manufacturer for testing.

1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules

General information

Physical isolation of non-Ex signals from Ex signals corresponds to the requirements with

regard to the configuration of explosion-protected automation technology. If the minimum

distance of 50 mm between bare connection terminals of Ex modules and bare connection

terminals of non-Ex modules can not be maintained, a DM 370 spacer module (order number

6ES7 370-0AA00-0AA0) must be fitted between these modules. Care must be taken to ensure

that all automation systems are routed to a common ground.

This means:

● All earthing screws of the sectional rails must be referred to a common ground.

● The earthing clip of all CPUs must be locked in position.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 17

Spacing for arrangement on several subracks

The following figure shows the spacing dimensions between the individual subracks as well

as to adjacent items of apparatus, cable ducts, cabinet panels etc. for a two-tier S7-300

configuration.

340 mm

40 mm

a200 mm+ a

IM 360

IM 361

Image 1-5 Spacing dimensions for a two-tier S7-300 configuration

➀ L+ supply

➁ EX CABLE DUCT

➂ NON-EX (24V) CABLE DUCT

If you maintain these minimum spacing dimensions then:

● you will guarantee heat dissipation of the S7-300 modules

● you will have sufficient space to insert and remove the S7-300 modules

● you will have sufficient space for installing lines

Note

If you use a shield support element, the specified dimensions apply as from the lower edge

of the shield support element.

The L+/M lines on the Ex modules can be wired directly or via connection elements.

For direct wiring, route the L+/M lines from the cable duct (if a line chamber is used) directly

to the terminals of the module front connector. You can route the Ex process lines directly from

the front connector to the apparatus.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

18 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

You can use commercially available clamp-type distributors for wiring via connection elements.

You then have the option of disconnecting the L+/M supply lines module by module by means

of a plug connector (see Fig. below).

Ex Ex

➀ Non Ex-cable duct

➁ Connection elements

➂ 15 mm top-hat rail

➃ Ex modules

➄ Ex cable duct

Image 1-6 Wiring between L+/M lines and Ex modules via connecting elements

See also

The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14)

Summary of Requirements of EN 60079-14 (Page 27)

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.4 Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 19

1.5 Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules

ET 200M configurations on two subracks

The Figure shows you two ET 200M configurations on two subracks. Place a DM 370 dummy

module between the IM153 and the first Ex I/O module in such a way that it doesn't occupy

any address area. If you are using an active backplane bus, use an Ex partition (order number

6ES7195-1KA00-0XA0) instead of the dummy module.

SIMATIC

ET 200M

IM 153

370

SIMATIC

ET 200M

IM 153

370

IM 153PS

➀ NON-EX CABLE DUCT

➁ EX CABLE DUCT

➂ S7-300 modules

➃ S7-300 modules

Image 1-7 Two subracks with ET 200M

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.5 Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

20 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems

General

Potential differences may develop between the bodies of electrical equipment which are

bonded to a protective conductor and the conductive elements of the construction which do

not belong to the electrical equipment, for example, the piping. The bridging of such potential

differences may cause ignition sparks. Equipotential bonding requires that conductive metal

parts which are not touch-protected are interconnected with the ground conductor. A practical

central point for equipotential bonding is the distribution cabinet. The cross-section of the

equipotential conductor should at least be equivalent to that of the corresponding protective

conductor. In all other situations, the minimum cross-section of the equipotential conductor is

10 mm2 Cu.

The backplane bus and I/O power circuits of Ex modules feature galvanically isolated, i.e.

equipotential bonding is not required for these modules. Exception: Connection to the

equipotential conductor if this is necessary for reasons of measuring technology. Where

lightning protection devices are required in the intrinsically safe circuit, they must be connected

to the EB conductor at the same point as the shield of the intrinsically safe circuits.

Generally speaking, the measures described in EN 60079-14 should be used or adhered to.

Generally, cable racks must be incorporated throughout the earthing system.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 21

Equipotential bonding in buildings

All buildings must be equipped with an equipotential bonding facility, to VDE 0100, Parts 410 /

540 and to DIN VDE 0185, which is interconnected with the overall cabling of the automation

system. Such facilities if missing must be installed.

+$7HUPLQDOEORFN3RZHUVXSSOLHV6HFRQGDU\HTXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJIRUWKHDXWRPDWLRQV\VWHP6(&21'$5<(48,327(17,$/%21',1*HJVWRU\GLVWULEXWLRQERDUG/LJKWQLQJSURWHFWLRQV\VWHP+RWZDWHU$QWHQQDV\VWHP,QWHUQDOJDVSLSH&RQQHFWLRQIRU71V\VWHP7HOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQV\VWHP,QVXODWRU)UHVKZDWHU(DUWKWHUPLQDWLRQ)RXQGDWLRQJURXQG0$,1(48,327(17,$/%21',1*:DVWHZDWHU+HDWLQJ6\VWHPVXUIDFH0DLQJURXQGFRQQHFWRU+HDWLQJ

Image 1-8 Main and secondary equipotential bonding to VDE

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

22 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Main equipotential bonding

This interconnects the following conductive elements by the EB conductor on the EB bus:

APA = 0.5 x APE main

● PE conductor

● Main ground conductor

● Earth termination

● Main water pipes

● Main gas pipes

● other metal piping systems

● Metal structural elements of the building (if possible)

● power and information system cables extending beyond the building, via lightning

conductor.

Additional equipotential bonding

Connecting the following conductive elements by the EB conductor on the EB bus:

● All "extraneous conductive elements" such as structural elements, supports, containers,

piping (these can themselves form EB conductors), APA = 0.5 x APEmax (A = cable cross

section) from the distrib. board.

● The bodies of stationary electrical equipment which can be touched simultaneously, if

interconnected with PEN (PE connection is sufficient otherwise), AEQ = 0.5 x APE of both

appliances.

/3(//19PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP(TXLSPHQWFDELQHW(TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ(%EXVJUHHQ\HOORZ

3(EXV3(EXV3(EXV3(EXV

3RZHUVXSSO\FDELQHW(TXLSPHQWFDELQHWZLWKH[PRGXOHV6WUXFWXUDOHOHPHQWVFRQWDLQHUVSLSLQJ7R(%VZLWFKURRP(TXLSPHQWFDELQHWZLWKH[PRGXOHV

Image 1-9 Example of equipotential bonding in M&C systems

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.6 Equipotential bonding of explosion protected systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 23

See also

Measures (Page 39)

1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

1.7.1 General information

Measures

Neither the electrical installation nor the required materials for this such as cables, lines and

installation materials are subject to the special test procedure of ElexV with respect to their

design. The responsibility of plant personnel or of an installation company for the proper

installation of an Ex system is particularly high on account of the risk of explosion in the event

of improper implementation.

General planning principles for cable routes are very similar to those for piping. At the drafting

stage of installation plans and building layouts, areas with increased risk of fire and danger

zones must be defined in accordance with ElexV and VbF. The focus should be set on cable

and piping tray installations in low-risk areas. Furthermore, accessibility and ease of

maintenance must be ensured, also for subsequent expansion. The cabling and line duct

passages between the control rooms and operational danger areas must be sealed

appropriately in order to prevent any ingress of dangerous gases or fumes into the control

room.

Note

Laying cables in ducts in the floor should be avoided. There is the risk

● of the penetration or the formation of potentially explosive gas / air mixtures and their

uncontrolled propagation,

● penetration of corrosive liquids.

The flexible multicore and single conductor cables used to install intrinsically safe power

circuits only require a diameter of ≥ 0.1 mm. For implementation in the Ex area, cables and

lines must primarily withstand the expected mechanical, chemical and thermal effects. It is

therefore always necessary to lay considerably larger cross sections and use cables and lines

that are flame-retardant and oil-resistant.

Intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe lines (conductors, non-sheathed cables) must be

laid separately or with appropriate insulation. Common routing in cables, lines and conductor

bundles is not permissible.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

24 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Special care must be taken to ensure full isolation in cable ducts. This can be achieved with

a continuous intermediate 1 mm layer of insulating material or by laying sheathed cables (see

following table).

Routing of cables for intrinsically safe circuits

Cable routed in separate, insulating cable ducts

> 1 mm

Cables routed in a common cable duct with an insulating inter‐

mediate layer (the solid insulating intermediate layer of > 1 mm

provides reliable isolation of the intrinsically safe lines in accord‐

ance with EN 60079-11).

Any cables of intrinsically / not intrinsically safe circuits with common routing must be capable

of withstanding a minimum test voltage of 500 V AC.

The high insulation voltage of 500 V AC can be dispensed with if the intrinsically safe or non-

intrinsically safe circuits are enclosed in a grounded shield. However, the cables of intrinsically

safe circuits must be capable of withstanding at least 500 VAC (conductor-conductor-ground).

Intrinsically safe lines must be clearly marked. If a color is used, it must be light-blue. An

exception to this rule is the routing of lines within equipment, distribution panels and

switchrooms. Cables and lines thus marked must not be used for other purposes.

In general, intrinsically safe circuits must be installed in a floating arrangement. A connection

to ground via a 15 kOhm resistor, e.g. to discharge electrostatic charges, does not qualify as

a ground. Intrinsically safe circuits must be bonded to ground if necessary for reasons of

measuring technology or safety. The circuit may only be grounded once to the equipotential

bonding system. Equipotential bonding must exist in the entire installation of intrinsically safe

circuits.

The terminal elements of systems which contain intrinsically / not intrinsically safe circuits, for

example, in measuring and control cabinets, must comply with EN 60079-11 directives. The

connections of the intrinsically safe circuits must be marked as intrinsically safe. Light-blue

must be used if color coding is preferred.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 25

1.7.2 Marking of Cables and Lines of Intrinsically Safe Circuits

Marking

Cables and lines of intrinsically safe circuits must be marked. Where jackets or sheaths are

color-coded, light-blue must be chosen as the color. Cables and lines thus marked must not

be used for other purposes. Equalizing conductors for thermocouples with a plastic sheath

may be provided with colored longitudinal stripes as follows, according to the type of

thermocouple:

Copper/cupro-nickel (copper/constantan) brown

Iron/cupro-nickel (iron/constantan) dark blue

Nickel-chrome/nickel green

Platinum-rhodium/platinum white

In the case of equalizing conductors for thermocouples with a mineral sheath or metal braid,

a light-blue strip of sufficient width must be woven in as the color code for intrinsic safety.

Within measurement and control cabinets and in the interior of switching and distribution

systems, special measures must be taken where there is a risk of interchanging the lines of

intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits, e.g. where there is a blue neutral conductor

in compliance with DIN 47002.

The following measures are acceptable:

● Bundling of conductors in a common light-blue sheath,

● Labeling,

● clear arrangement and physical separation.

1.7.3 Wiring and Cabling in Cable Bedding Made of Metal or in Conduits

Protection measures

Cable bedding made of metal must be incorporated in the protective measures to counteract

indirect contact. This can be achieved by routing an existing ground conductor made of steel

strip or with a good conductive connection between individual beds.

For single laying, conduits made of metal are now only usually used where particular

mechanical or thermal stress is developed. In general, PVC conduits of two different types are

used depending on the expected mechanical stress. Remember, however, that PVC exhibits

a linear expansion which is about 8 times that of metal. The fixing points must therefore be

such that the linear expansion is taken up.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

26 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

1.7.4 Summary of Requirements of EN 60079-14

Overview

The table below once again highlights the most important cable and conductor specifications

to EN 60079-14.

Table 1-1 Cables and lines

application Requirements of cables and lines

General requirements:

note additional require‐

ments for "i" and zone 0)

● Select according to mechanical, chemical and thermal influences

(refer to DIN VDE 0298 and DIN VDE 0891)

● Protection against the distribution of fire. Cable routing in sand, for

example. Proof of combustibility properties of cables in accordance

with DIN VDE 0472 part 804, test type B.

● Cu or Al conductors. Al conductors should only be used when

installing multicore cables starting at 25 mm2, or single-conductor

cables starting at 35 mm2, using suitable terminal elements.

(smaller cross section per‐

missible for multicore lines

with more than 5 cores, and

lines for measurement and

control)

● Minimum cross sections for copper

conductor:

single-core cable:

multi-core cable:

1 mm fine,

1.5 mm solid conductor

0.75 mm fine, otherwise as

above

Permissible types for porta‐

ble/mobile apparatus (does

not apply to intrinsically

safe systems)

● U <= 750 V Flexible cable H07RN or equiv‐

alent (e.g. NSHou)

● U <= 250 V flexible cable H07RN or equiv‐

alent

● I <= 6 A no severe mechanical stresses

● in M&C systems,

Wire remote control and

telecommunications system

Plastic-sheathed flexible cable

H05VV-F minimum cross sec‐

tion 1 mm2 (not at ambient tem‐

peratures below 5 °C)

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 27

Table 1-2 Contents of EN 60079‑14, continued

Application Requirements of cables and lines

Laying cables and lines ● Sealing of cable passages in Ex and non-Ex areas, for

example, by means of sand pockets, plastering or similar.

● Sealing of unused cable inlets using certified caps

(certification not required for Zone 2)

● where there is particular thermal, mechanical or chemical

stress, protect cables and lines, e.g. by laying in conduit,

sheaths, metal tubing (not in enclosed conduits)

● where routed into a pressure-resistant enclosure, use

certified cable lead-in elements.

Connection of cables and lines ● Conductors outside the appliance may only be connected

by crimping.

● Conductor connections within apparatus should use

suitable clamps, multicore or fine conductor ends should

be secured against separation

● Crimp connections can be protected with cast resin

applications or heatshrink sleeves, provided these are not

subject to mechanical stress.

See also

Types of cables (Page 29)

1.7.5 Selecting the cables and wires in accordance with EN 60079-14

Specification

Cables and wires laid in hazardous areas do not require a test certificate in accordance with

Elex V. The electrical data of cables used for intrinsically safe M&C circuits must be specified

(for example, capacitance at 200 nF/km, inductivity at 1 mH/km).

The following applies within a group cable:

The insulation between lines of intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits must

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

28 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

withstand an alternating voltage of 2U + 1000 V, but at least 1500 V, where U is the sum of

rms voltage values of the intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe circuits.

Table 1-3 Minimum cross sections of copper conductors in accordance with

Cable type Number of

cores

Flexible stran‐

ded conductor

mm2

Solid conduc‐

tor mm2

Conductor di‐

ameter mm

Power cables and lines in ac‐

cordance with DIN VDE 0298,

Part 1, 3

2 - 5

> 5

0,75

0,5

1,5

Wiring cables and lines in ac‐

cordance with DIN VDE 0891,

Parts 1, 5, 6 for voltages

> 1 0,5 0,5 0,8

< AC 60 V or

120 V DC

> 2

2 (shielded)

0,5

0,28

0,5

0,28

0,8

0,6

1.7.6 Types of cables

Overview

Suitable process signal cables are installation cables for industrial electronic systems

(SIMATIC cable) with bundled twisted-pair, color-coded conductors. Cables with a solid

conductor (0.5 mm2 cross section, 0.8 mm diameter) have a static shield. Cables with flexible

stranded conductors (J-LIYCY) have a braided shield (C) made of copper wires.

Table 1-4 Types of cables

Cable designation Cable for

A-Y(St) YY

J-Y(St) Y

J-LiYY

J-LiYCY

nx2x0.8/1.4 BdSi

nx2x0.5/1.6 BdSi

Outdoor cable (burying in ground1)

Normal applications

Compact control stations

Vibration and impact stresses

Connector installation

1 Direct burying in ground is not recommended.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 29

Type designations for lines in accordance with harmonized standards

The type designations for lines in accordance with harmonized standards are listed in the

following:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 Basic type H harmonized type

A national type

2 rated voltage 03 300/300 Volt

05 300/500 Volt

07 450/750 Volt

3 insulating material V PVC

R Rubber

S silicon rubber

4 sheath material V PVC

R Rubber

N cloroprene rubber

J glass fiber braid

T fabric braid

5 Special features H ribbon cable, separable

H2 ribbon cable, not separable

6 Conductor U single-core

R multi-core

K fine (permanently installed)

F fine (flexible)

H extra fine wire

Y tinsel

7 Number of cores ... Number of cores

8 protective conductor X without protective conductor

G with protective conductor

9 conductor cross section ... specified in mm2

Image 1-10 Type designations for lines in accordance with harmonized standards

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

30 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Type designations for telecommunication cables and lines

Type designations for telecommunication cables and lines are listed in the following:

1 2 3 4 5 6 78 9

1 0 1 1

1 Basic type A Outdoor cable

G Mining cable

J Wiring cable

L Sheathed cable

S Switchboard cable

2 Supplement B Lightning protection system

J Induction-protected

E Electronics

3 Insulating material Y PVC

2Y Polyethylene

O2Y Cellular PE

5Y PTFE

6Y FEP

7Y ETFE

P PAPER

4 Design features F

(ST)

(K)

Petrolatum filler

Aluminum sheath

Corrugated aluminum

Aluminum tape

Metal foil shield

Copper tape shield

Corrugated steel sheath

Lead sheath

Special lead sheath

Armoring

Jute sheath & ground

Compound layer + tape

5 Sheath material (refer to 3. Isolation)

6 Number of elements n Number of stranding elements

7 Stranding element 1 Single core

2 Pair

8 Conductor diameter ... in mm

9 Stranding element F Star quad (railway)

St Star quad (phantom)

St I Star quad (long distance cable)

St III Star quad (local cable)

TF Star quad for TF

S Signal cable (railway)

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 31

PiMF shielded pair

10 Type of stranding Lg Layer stranding

Bd Unit stranding

11 Sheath color BL blue

Table 1-5 Siemens cables for measurement and control to DIN VDE 0815

Cable designation Order Number

JE-LIYCY

JE-Y(ST)Y

2x2x0.5 BD SI BL

16x2x0.5 BD SI BL

32x2x0.5 BD SI BL

2x2x0.8 BD SI BL

16x2x0.8 BD SI BL

32x2x0.8 BD SI BL

100x2x0.8 BD SI BL

V45483-F25-C15

V45483-F165-C15

V45483-F325-C55

V45480-F25-C25

V45480-F165-C35

V45480-F325-C25

V45480-F1005-C15

Characteristic values of cables for intrinsically safe circuits

Example: Cable type JE-LiYCY

Coupling 200 pF/100 m at 800 Hz

Working capacity c. 200 nF/km at 800 Hz

Working inductance c. 1 mH/km

Minimum bending radius for permanent installation 6 x line diameter

Temperature range, permanent installation - 30 °C to 70 °C

for moveable use - 5 °C to 50 °C

Test voltage core/core 2000 V,

core/shield 500 V,

Loop resistance c. 80 Ω/km

1.7.7 Requirements of Terminals for Intrinsically Safe Type of Protection

Requirements

These must be identifiable, for example by their type designation, and the following

constructional requirements must be observed:

● Clearance in air and leakage path in accordance with EN 60079-0/EN 60079-11 between

two connection elements of different intrinsically safe circuits must be at least 6 mm.

● Clearance in air and leakage path between connection elements of each intrinsically safe

circuit and grounded metal parts must be not less than 3 mm.

● Marking of connection elements must be unambiguous and easily recognized. When a

color is used for this purpose, it must be light blue.

The following must also be observed with regard to the use of terminals:

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.7 Wiring and Cabling in Ex Systems

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

32 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Connection terminals of intrinsically safe circuits must be at a distance of at least 50 mm from

connection elements or bare conductors of any non-intrinsically safe circuit, or must be isolated

from it by an insulating partition or grounded metal partition. When such partitions are used,

they must extend at least by up to 1.5 mm from the housing panels, or must ensure a minimum

clearance of 50 mm between connection elements, measured around the partition in all

directions.

The insulation between an intrinsically safe circuit and the chassis of the electrical apparatus

or parts which may be grounded must withstand an alternating rms voltage of twice the voltage

value of the intrinsically safe circuit, but at least 500 V.

1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage

1.8.1 Shielding

Definition

Shielding is a method of attenuating magnetic, electric or electromagnetic interference fields.

Shielding can be subdivided into

● Equipment Shielding

● Line Shielding

1.8.2 Equipment Shielding

General information

Particularly observe the following when cabinets and housings are incorporated in control

system shielding:

● Cabinet covers such as side panels, rear panels, top and bottom panels, must make contact

in an overlapping arrangement at adequate distances (e.g. 50 mm).

● Doors must be given additional contact with the cabinet ground. Use several grounding

strips.

● Lines exiting the shielded housing should either be shielded or routed via filters.

● Where the cabinet contains sources of severe interference (transformers, lines to motors,

etc.), they must be partitioned from sensitive electronic areas with metal plates. The metal

plates must have several low-impedance bolted joints to the cabinet ground.

Interference voltages picked up in the programmable controller via non-Ex signal and supply

lines are diverted to the central ground point (standard sectional rail).

The central ground point should have a low-impedance connection to the PE conductor via a

copper conductor (> = 10 mm2) which is as short as possible.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 33

1.8.3 Line Shielding

Non-Ex circuits

Both ends of the cable shields are usually bonded to cabinet potential at a suitable conductive

point. Satisfactory suppression of all frequencies picked up can only be achieved by shielding

at both ends.

Shielding of systems with optimal equipotential bonding

Vital aspects in the optimization of a system's EMC properties are the shielding of system

components and, in particular, of their connecting cables, and that the system shielding forms

an encompassing electrical shell. The significance of this requirement increases with the scope

of signal frequencies processed in the systems. In ideal cases, the cable shields are connected

to the housings which are often metal or corresponding shielding of the connected field devices.

Since, as a rule, they are linked to chassis ground (or to the PE conductor), the shield of the

signal cable is grounded at several points. This procedure is optimum for electromagnetic

compatibility and personal protection. It can be applied in these systems without any

restrictions.

667HUPLQDOEORFN6WXEFDEOH0DLQFDEOH([PRGXOHV&HQWUDOJURXQGLQJSRLQW(TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJFRQGXFWRU6WXEFDEOH)LHOGGHYLFH)LHOGGHYLFH

Image 1-11 Shielding and equipotential bonding conductors for non-Ex circuits

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

34 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Ex circuits

Three aspects must be considered with regard to the design of shielding and grounding of an

S7-300 system:

● Ensuring electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

● Explosion protection

● Personal protection

Grounding and shielding of intrinsically safe circuits

EN 60079-14 stipulates general equipotential bonding in potentially explosive environments

in order to prevent potential differences and resultant sparking. The equipotential bonding

system must be designed and implemented to DIN VDE 0100!

In accordance with EN 60079-14, intrinsically safe circuits are generally not grounded. They

must be grounded if this is required for safety reasons. They can be grounded if this is required

for functional reasons. The circuit may only be grounded once to the equipotential bonding

system.

Intrinsically safe signal lines and cables are shielded in order to meet measuring technology

requirements or to prevent inductive coupling, because the system often generates low signal

levels.

The section below outlines the procedures of planning the equipotential bonding of intrinsically

safe signal lines:

● Metal enclosures with safe contact to construction elements as a result of their mounting

fixtures are integrated in the system's equipotential bonding circuit and thus do not require

separate grounding.

● The shielding is grounded at only one point in order to avoid looping. In Zone 1, 2 and 21

systems, the shielding is grounded outside the danger area, i.e. ideally in the measurement

control system.

The cable shields must be isolated from devices operated in the potentially explosive zone.

The measured value is routed via twisted-pair signal cable (single cable) to a distribution

cabinet, and from there to the measuring room via multicore cable. The shield is insulated at

all intermediate points.

In Zone 0, the cable shield is connected to equipotential ground by wiring it directly to the

device connection housing (usually Zone 1). The apparatus is grounded directly via the ground

conductor.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 35

Shielding of lines in the hazardous area

Table 1-6 Shielding of Ex lines in the hazardous area

Ex area Non-Ex area

SIMATIC Ex modules

(1) Sensor or actuator

(2) shield

(3) line

1 2

(1) Shield support with strain relief

(2) cable shield

(1) strain relief

(2) insulation

1.8.4 Measures to Counteract Interference Voltages

Assembling the control system

Measures to suppress interference voltages are often only implemented when the control

system is already in operation and proper reception of a useful signal is impaired. Expenditure

involved with such measures (special relays, for example) can be reduced considerably when

installing the control system by making allowances for the items outlined below.

Included here:

● favorable arrangement of equipment and lines

● grounding of all inactive metal elements

● filtering of power cables and signal lines

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

36 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● shielding of equipment and lines

● special interference-suppression measures

Physical arrangement of equipment and lines

Magnetic DC or AC fields of low frequency, such as 50 Hz, can only be sufficiently attenuated

at great expense. In such a case, however, you can often solve the problem by providing the

greatest possible distance between the interference source and sink.

Note

The analog Ex modules operate based on a method which suppresses faults caused by AC

system ripple.

Grounding of inactive metal elements

Well implemented grounding is an important factor for interference-free assembly. Grounding

is understood to mean a good electrical connection of all inactive metal elements (VDE 0160).

The principle of surface grounding should be followed. All conductive, inactive metal elements

should be grounded!

Observe the following when grounding:

● All ground connections must have a low impedance.

● All metal elements should have a large-area connection. Use particularly wide grounding

strips for the connection. The surface of the ground connection and not only its cross section

is decisive.

● Screw-type connections should always have spring washers or lock washers.

Protection against electrostatic discharge

In order to protect the devices and modules against electrostatic discharge, these should be

installed in fully enclosed metal housings or cabinets which feature proper conductive

connections both to the grounding busbar at the installation location and to the main

equipotential conductor.

You should preferably use cast iron or steel sheet enclosures. Plastic housings should always

have a metallized surface.

Doors or covers of housings should be connected to the grounded body of the housing with

ground strips or contact springs.

If you are working on the system with the cabinet open, observe the guidelines for protective

measures for electrostatically sensitive devices (ESDs).

The risk of ignition as a result of electrostatic charge must be safely excluded in the system

installation. Refer to "Guidelines for avoiding the risk of ignition resulting from electrostatic

charges" laid down by the main association of Industrial Employers' Liability Insurance.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 37

If electrostatic charges cannot be avoided, the charge should be kept as low as possible or

safe discharge should be provided. The following measures, in particular, should be applied:

● Electrostatic grounding of all conductive elements. Solid materials can be considered as

being electrostatically grounded if their leakage resistance at any point is not greater than

106 Ω. Under favorable conditions, 108 Ω is also satisfactory, particularly for small

equipment of low capacitance.

● Reducing the electrical resistance of the material moved or parts moved with respect to

each other.

● Incorporating grounded metal elements in material subject to electrostatic charging.

● Increasing the relative air humidity. By increasing the relative air humidity to about 65 %

with air conditioning, sprays or by hanging moist cloths, the surface resistance of most non-

conductive materials can be adequately reduced. However, if the surface of plastic material

is water-repellent, this measure will not succeed.

● Ionization of the air.

1.8.5 The Most Important Basic Rules for Ensuring EMC

Overview

To ensure EMC, it is often sufficient to observe some elementary rules. When assembling the

control system, take into consideration the five following basic rules.

1. When installing the programmable controllers, ensure high quality surface grounding of the

inactive metal elements

– Connect all inactive metal elements over a large area and at low impedance.

– On painted and anodized metal elements, make screwed connections with special

contact washers or remove the insulating protective layers.

– Provide a central connection between chassis ground and the ground/protective

conductor system.

2. When wiring always follow the code of practice for line routing

– Subdivide the cabling into line groups.

– (AC power cables, supply lines, Ex and non-Ex signal lines, data lines).

– Always install power cables and signal or data lines in separate ducts or bundles.

– Route the signal and data lines as closely as possible to grounded surfaces such as

supporting bars, metal rails, cabinet sheet metal panels.

– Install Ex and non-Ex signal lines in separate ducts.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.8 Shielding and Measures to Counteract Interference Voltage

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

38 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

3. Ensure that line shields are properly secured

– Data lines should be shielded when laid. The shield should be connected accordingly,

see chapter Line Shielding (Page 34).

– Analog lines should be shielded when laid. When low-amplitude signals are transmitted,

it may be advantageous if the shield is connected at only one end.

– For Ex signal lines, connect the line shields only at the sensor or actuator end. Ensure

the connected shield continues without interruption as far as the module, but do not

connect it there.

– Make sure the shield has a low-impedance connection to equipotential ground.

– Use metal or metallized plug housings for shielded data lines.

4. Implement special EMC measures for particular applications

– For all inductances, fit quenching elements provided they are not already contained in

the output modules.

– Use incandescent bulbs for lighting the cabinets and avoid fluorescent lamps.

5. Harmonize the reference potential and, where possible, connect all electrical components

to ground

– Take care to ensure specific grounding measures. Grounding of the control system is

a protective and functional measure.

– System elements and cabinets should be connected in star-configuration to the ground/

protective conductor system. In this way you can avoid the formation of ground loops.

– Install equipotential conductors of sufficient size to compensate for any potential

differences between the system components and cabinets.

1.9 Lightning Protection

1.9.1 Measures

Overview

In systems with hazardous areas, the most important task, not least for reasons of explosion

protection, is to avoid overvoltages; where this is not possible, they must be reduced and safely

discharged.

In addition to the provision of external lightning protection, these measures cover internal

lightning protection and overvoltage protection. These measures must be coordinated with the

equipment-related EMC.

You will find more detailed information on the subjects of lightning protection and overvoltage

protection in the manuals of the individual systems as specified in the foreword. Here, you will

also find an overview of the components which can be used for this purpose.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.9 Lightning Protection

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 39

1.9.2 External Lightning Protection/Shielding of Buildings

Measures

External lightning protection is a measure for preventing damage to buildings and fire damage.

For this task, a large-mesh wire cage consisting of lightning conductors and down conductors

is sufficient.

On buildings with sensitive electronic equipment such as control rooms, the external lightning

protection must be supplemented by a building shield. For these purposes, where possible,

metal facades and reinforcements of walls, floors and ceilings on or in the building are

connected to form shield cages. Where this is not possible, the lightning conductor and down

conductor should have a reduced mesh size and, where applicable, the supporting structure

of the intermediate floor should be electrically interconnected.

Electrical equipment protruding above roof level must be protected against direct lightning

strikes. When such equipment is metallically connected to the external lightning protection

system, a partial current is picked up by the building in the event of a lightning strike; this can

result in destruction of the equipment sensitive to overvoltages. The pick-up of partial lightning

currents can be prevented by protecting the electrical equipment protruding above the roof

from direct lightning strikes by means of rods insulated from the equipment (45 degree

protective area), or by cage-type tensioned wires or cables.

The down conductors for external lightning protection and, if applicable, the reinforcements

and supporting structures, should be connected to the ground system. Each individual building

has its own functioning ground system. The ground systems are meshed to create a common

grounding network. The voltage between the buildings is thus reduced.

1.9.3 Creating distributed systems with S7-300 and ET 200M

Measures

The process engineering of a plant, such as gas supply, requires a wide-ranging exchange of

information between the systems with the distributed Ex I/O devices and the central, electrical

or electronic measurement and control system. This necessitates a great number of cable

connections, sometimes extending over several hundred meters - in the case of gas storage

systems, over several thousands of meters. In the event of a lightning strike, therefore,

extensive voltage pick-up occurs.

A distributed arrangement of instrumentation and control equipment with relatively short cables

to the plant, and the connection of distributed I/O stations to each other and to the central

controller via a bus (PROFIBUS-DP) or fiber-optic cable, are an important measure for

reducing overvoltages between sections of the plant.

You will find more detailed information on this arrangement in the

manuals

specified in the

foreword.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.9 Lightning Protection

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

40 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

1.9.4 Shielding of Cables and Buildings

Measures

Overvoltages between separate plant sections or buildings cannot be avoided in practice by

meshing. In the event of a lightning strike, a circulating current will flow over the path created

by metal connections between the buildings or between a building and I/O device. Cable cores

are ideal for this purpose. The lightning or partial lightning current must therefore be offered

other conductive connections. Shielding which can be implemented in different ways is

particularly suitable, for example:

● a helical current-rated metal strip or metal braid as the cable shield, e.g. NYCY or A2Y(K)Y.

● By installing the cables in continuously connected metal conduits which are grounded at

both ends.

● By installing the cables in reinforced concrete ducts with through-connected reinforcement

or on closed metal cable racks.

● By laying conductors (shield conductors) in parallel with cables. This measure, however,

only relieves the cables of partial lightning currents.

● By laying fiber-optic cables.

Overvoltage-sensitive equipment must also be shielded to ensure the currents at the cable

ends cannot destroy this equipment. This is achieved with metal housings or by installing the

equipment in metal cabinets which are connected to the ground conductor.

1.9.5 Equipotential bonding for lightning protection

Measures

"Internal lightning protection" covers all the additional measures which prevent the magnetic

and electrical effects of the lightning current within the building to be protected. These

measures include in particular "equipotential bonding for lightning protection" in order to reduce

potential differences caused by lightning current.

Internal lightning protection is based on the principle of the inclusion of all incoming and

outgoing lines of a protected volume in the equipotential bonding system for lightning

protection, i.e. in addition to the entire metal piping systems (gas, water and heating), this

includes all power and IT cables which must be wired to corresponding protective devices.

Since considerable, partial lightning currents can flow over such lines and must be discharged

by the protective devices, they must be chosen for a suitable current carrying capacity (lightning

current conductors).

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.9 Lightning Protection

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 41

1.9.6 Overvoltage Protection

General

Effectiveness depends very much on the connection and cable routing of the overvoltage

protection devices. When the devices are used in hazardous areas or intrinsically safe circuits,

EN60079-14 must be adhered to.

When the system is installed, the minimum igniting curves and maximum heating specified by

EN 60079-11 must be adhered to.

Overvoltage protection in intrinsically safe circuits

Overvoltage protection devices can protect intrinsically safe circuits from overvoltage.

+D]DUGRXVDUHD/LJKWQLQJDUUHVWHU6HQVRU([PRGXOH&HQWUDOJURXQGLQJSRLQW6DIHDUHD/LJKWQLQJDUUHVWHU

Image 1-12 Overvoltage protection in intrinsically safe circuits

The discussion of safety-relevant aspects is limited to the direct comparison of the data for

inductance and capacity.

Table 1-7 Comparison of data for inductance and capacity

Ex module Comparison Lightning ar‐

rester 1

Line Lightning ar‐

rester 2

Sensor/actua‐

tor

La ≥ LBD1 +LLtg +LBD2 +Li

Ca ≥ CBD1 +CLtg +CBD2 +Ci

Table 1-8 Example of the comparison of data for inductance and capacity

Ex module Comparison Lightning ar‐

rester 1

Line Lightning ar‐

rester 2

Sensor/actua‐

tor

La = 4 mH ≥ < 0.5 µH < 50 µH < 0.5 mH < 0.6 mH

Ca = 270 nF ≥ < 1 nF < 10 nF < 6 nF < 6 nF

The overvoltage protection elements described in this section are only effective if used together

with external lightning protection. External lightning protection measures reduce the effects of

a lightning strike.

You can obtain suitable lightning conductors for Ex modules from:

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.9 Lightning Protection

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

42 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

DEHN + SÖHNE

GmbH + Co. KG

Elektrotechnische Fabrik

Hans-Dehn-Str. 1

D-92318 Neumarkt

http://www.dehn.de (http://www.dehn.de)

1.9.7 Example of Lightning and Overvoltage Protection

Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas compressor station

Fig. "Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas compressor station" shows an example of how

protective devices can be used.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.9 Lightning Protection

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 43

03$0

r

3$3URWHFWLYHGHYLFHIRU$&SRZHUV\VWHP&DEOHGXFWVKLHOGHG$QQH[0&HTXLSPHQW0&FDELQHW/9V\VWHP&RQWUROURRP,QVXODWLQJIODQJH/DPS0HWDOFRQGXLW&RPSUHVVRUED\VKLHOGHG&DEOHUDFNVDV(%ULQJ,QVXODWLRQ6PRNHGHWHFWRU6WDWLRQJURXQG6XEGLYLVLRQV\VWHP&RQWUROURRPVKLHOGHG3URWHFWLYHGHYLFHIRU0&V\VWHPV6SDUNJDS3URWHFWLYHGHYLFHUHTXLUHGIRUKLJKFRVW0&HTXLSPHQW3URWHFWLYHGHYLFHQRWUHTXLUHGIRUVKLHOGHGFDEOHVDQGORZFRVW0&HTXLSPHQW3URWHFWLYHGHYLFHQRWUHTXLUHGIRUHTXLSPHQWZLWKKLJKGLHOHFWULFVWUHQJWK3URWHFWLYHGHYLFHQRWUHTXLUHGZLWKVXLWDEOHV\VWHPVKLHOGLQJ

Image 1-13 Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas compressor station

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.9 Lightning Protection

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

44 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

1.9.8 Lightning Strike

Measures

When lightning strikes an explosive atmosphere it always ignites. There is also a risk of ignition

due to an excessive rise in temperature in the lightning discharge paths. In order to prevent,

at Zones 0, 1 and 20 themselves, the harmful effects of lightning strikes occurring outside of

these zones, surge diverters, for example, must be fitted at suitable points. Overground metal

tank systems which are equipped with electrical appliances or electrically conductive

components which are electrically isolated to the container require equipotential bonding, for

example, of measuring and control equipment and of the filling tubes.

Note

Lightning protection equipment and grounding systems must be tested by an expert upon their

completion and at regular intervals. In conjunction with ElexV, an inspection interval of three

years is specified for electrical and lightning protection systems operated in potentially

explosive rooms.

Summary:

● Enhanced external lightning protection (reduced mesh size, increased number of down

conductors) on all buildings and systems.

● Meshing of grounding systems in the building to create area grounding.

● Meshed equipotential bonding.

● Fitting of lightning conductors and surge diverters in the power system.

● Fitting of overvoltage fine-protection devices at both ends of measurement and control

cables.

● Shielding of M&C cables.

● M&C cables with twisted pairs of cores.

1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas

1.10.1 Safety Measures

Introduction

All possible measures which eliminate the risk of explosion must be implemented not only

when using programmable controllers in hazardous areas but also during the installation stage.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 45

Sparks capable of causing ignition during mechanical work

Tools which tend to produce sparks must not be used for working in potentially explosive

systems or system sections in operation. Copperberyllium is a suitable material for tools such

as screwdrivers, pliers, wrenches, hammers and chisels. Since this material has low wear-

resistance, the tools should be used with care.

Sparks capable of causing ignition during mechanical work

low when bare steel elements strike each other

possible when steel elements collide or drop

great when striking rusty steel

very great when striking rusty steel with an alloy coating (e.g. aluminum paint)

The possibility of creating sparks capable of causing ignition is substantially reduced by using

non-sparking tools. Exception: when the tool is harder than the workpiece.

Measures for eliminating the risk of explosion

Safely closing off the working area, e.g. with dummy panels.

● Good ventilation of the rooms.

● Flushing with inert gas. Testing the effectiveness of the flushing (gas tester). Then working

with a normal tool.

If the risk of explosion at the workplace cannot be eliminated, the following measures must be

implemented:

● Avoidance of collisions and dropping of steel elements.

● Wearing antistatic shoes, e.g. leather shoes or using shoe grounding strips.

● Avoiding rust layers and aluminum coating at impact points. If this is not possible,

eliminating the risk of explosion locally, e.g. with inert gas.

● Adequate air supply and waste air disposal.

● Removing or enclosing readily flammable substances in the vicinity.

● Keeping the workplace and, if applicable, floor moist.

Table 1-9 Safety Measures

Working area Safety Measures

Installations with readily flammable gas

and vapor-air mixtures, e.g. hydrogen,

city gas, acetylene and hydrogen sul‐

phide

Working only allowed after implementation of special safety

measures and with written permission of plant manager. Only

non-sparking tools to be used (tool softer than workpiece).

Installations with gas and vapor-air mix‐

tures such as methane, propane, bu‐

tane and petrol

Sufficient to use non-sparking tools. Exception: For materials

with rust formation and aluminum coating or similar, special

protective measures required.

Installations with risk of explosion from

readily flammable dust

Remove dust deposits.

Keep working area wet and protect against dust formation.

Normal tools may be used.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

46 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Note

Working on energized electrical installations and apparatus in hazardous industrial premises

is prohibited. This also includes the disconnection of live control lines for test purposes.

As an exception, work on intrinsically safe circuits is permitted; also, in special cases, work on

other electrical systems where the user has certified in writing that there is no risk of explosion

for the duration of the work at the site.

If necessary, a fire permit must also be obtained.

Grounding and short-circuiting may only be carried out in hazardous industrial premises when

there is no risk of explosion at the point of grounding and short-circuiting.

Use measuring instruments which are approved for the zones to test for no voltages.

1.10.2 Use of Ex Assemblies in Hazardous Zone 2

License

SIMATIC S7 Ex modules are permitted for use in zone 2 (category 3G). Note in this case the

specific conditions on the EU special test certificate (see certificates of conformity on

theInternet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200)).

1.10.3 Use of Ex Assemblies in Hazardous Zone 1

Types of protection

It is basically possible to install a SIMATIC assembly in a hazardous area zone 1. However,

the system installer must implement additional measures in order to protect the modules. Two

types of protection are available:

● the Ex assembly is installed in a "pressurized enclosure";

● the Ex assembly is installed in a "pressure-resistant, enclosed casing".

The following figure shows a possible configuration for zone 1 in a pressure-resistant, enclosed

casing with a terminal housing that provides an increased level of safety.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 47

36&3860V,01RQH[FDEOHGXFW([Gb6ZLWFK([Hb&DELQHW([Hb7HUPLQDO([Lb7HUPLQDOV3URILEXV'3EXVFDEOHV$XWRPDWLRQV\VWHP([VHQVRUVDFWXDWRUV6DIHDUHD=RQH9'&VXSSO\YROWDJH([LFDEOHGXFW([Gb&DELQHW

Image 1-14 SIMATIC Ex modules in hazardous area

Housing

The selected type of housing is characterized by the fact that it is able to withstand explosions

occurring inside the housing and that an explosive gas/air mixture surrounding the housing is

not ignited. In addition, the surface temperature does not exceed the limit values of the

temperature classes. Cable glands that are protected against transmission of internal ignition

and isolated against the housing wall must be used for routing the supply leads into the

pressure-resistant, enclosed casing.

A housing with "increased safety" is used as a terminal compartment. Special screwed glands

are used for the cable entries.

The housing must be certified by a testing authority to comply with the "Ex d" type of protection

and the relevant design requirements.

Explosion protection of the housing: Ex de II T5 .. T6.

Cables

The cables used must comply with the EN 60079-0 and EN 60079-11 standards for intrinsically

safe circuits or EN 60079-7 for circuits with increased safety.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

48 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

The cables for the assembly are to be installed in such a way that they are endangered neither

by thermal, mechanical nor chemical load or stress.

Note

If necessary, the cables should be installed in cable conduits.

Terminals

The terminal connectors for the power supply cable and the bus line should always meet the

requirements of the "increased safety" tape of protection. The clamping points of the

intrinsically safe circuits should always be implemented according to the guidelines of "Intrinsic

safety".

Protective device

The assembly is connected to a 24 V DC supply circuit fed by a power supply unit with safe

electrical isolation. The supply circuit must be protected by an appropriate circuit-breaker. This

circuit-breaker is installed outside the Ex zone.

Switch

The switch for enabling the system should comply with the "Ex de II T6" type of protection.

Table 1-10 Working on systems to type of protection: Ex de [ib] T5 .. T6

Type of protection

of apparatus used

in system

Type of work to be

carried out

Work within Additional require‐

ments and notes

Ex ib Zone 1 Zone 2

Opening the hous‐

ing, Ex i/e housing

only

allowed allowed if no other appara‐

tus is in the hous‐

ing

Connecting/dis‐

connecting lines

allowed allowed

Current, voltage

and resistance

measurement

allowed with certi‐

fied apparatus

allowed

Soldering prohibited allowed if solder‐

ing temperature

lower than ignition

temperature

Ex e Zone 1 Zone 2

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.10 Installation Work in Hazardous Areas

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 49

Type of protection

of apparatus used

in system

Type of work to be

carried out

Work within Additional require‐

ments and notes

Opening the hous‐

ing, Ex i/e housing

only

allowed allowed if no other appara‐

tus is in the hous‐

ing

Connecting/dis‐

connecting lines

not allowed unless

in de-energized

state

only in de-ener‐

gized state and if

no risk of explosion

Current, voltage

and resistance

measurement

voltage measure‐

ment with certified

apparatus only

voltage measure‐

ment with certified

apparatus only

Soldering prohibited allowed in de-ener‐

gized state if sol‐

dering tempera‐

ture lower than ig‐

nition temperature

Ex d Zone 1 Zone 2

Opening the hous‐

ing, Ex d housing

only

prohibited allowed if no risk of

explosion

apparatus in pres‐

sure-resistant en‐

closure are no lon‐

ger protected

against explosion

if housing is

opened

Connecting/dis‐

connecting lines

not allowed unless

in de-energized

state

allowed if no risk of

explosion

Current, voltage

and resistance

measurement

Work not possible allowed if no risk of

explosion

Soldering prohibited allowed in de-ener‐

gized state if sol‐

dering tempera‐

ture lower than ig‐

nition temperature

1.11 Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus

Replacing equipment

Work on electrical systems or equipment can only be carried out if a "permit" has been granted.

If electrical equipment is replaced, attention must be paid to the correct temperature class,

explosion group, and corresponding (Ex) zone. Certificates of conformity, EU special test

certificates, and design approval must be available.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.11 Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

50 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Maintaining apparatus

Repaired electrical apparatus may only be placed in operation again after testing by a

recognized expert in accordance with paragraph 15 of ElexV, and the test has been certified,

unless explosion protection has not been affected by the repair. If the repair affects explosion

protection, only original spare parts may be used. Improvised repairs which no longer ensure

explosion protection of apparatus are not permitted.

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.11 Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 51

Mechanical Configuration of an Automation System with SIMATIC S7 Ex Modules

1.11 Maintenance of Electrical Apparatus

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

52 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules 2

2.1 Chapter overview

Overview

The following SIMATIC S7 Ex digital modules are described in this chapter:

● Digital input SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR,

Order number: 6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0

● Digital output SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA,

Order number: 6ES7322-5SD00-0AB0

● Digital output SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA,

Order number: 6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0

Notes

You will find information on the relevant safety standards and on other safety regulations in

the Appendix Standards and Licenses (Page 249).

The general technical specifications in the device manual S7-300 Module Specifications, see

Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8859629).

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

2.2.1 Features and technical specifications

Order Number

6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0

Features

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR has the following properties:

● 4 inputs

– electrically isolated from the bus

– electrically isolated from each other

● load voltage 24 V DC

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 53

● connectable sensors

– to DIN EN 60947-5-6 or IEC 60947-5-6

– interconnected mechanical contacts (with diagnostic evaluation)

– open-circuited mechanical contacts (without diagnostics)

● 4 short circuit-proof outputs for the encoder power supply (8.2 V)

● Operating points:

logic "1" ≥ 2.1 mA

logic "0" ≤ 1.2 mA

● Status indication (0...3) = green LEDs

Fault indications = red LEDs for

– group fault indication (SF)

– channel-related short-circuit and wire-break error message (F0 to F3)

● configurable diagnostics

● configurable diagnostic interrupt

● configurable process interrupt

● Intrinsic safety of inputs in accordance with EN 60079-11

● 2-wire encoder connection

● Supports time stamping

● Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

54 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Wiring diagram of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

....;)6))))/....0/0NNN5'$%60',[1$085[[[&RQWDFWZLWKRXWPRQLWRULQJ&RQWDFWZLWK0RQLWRULQJIRUZLUHEUHDNRQO\LIUHVLVWDQFHGLUHFWO\RQFRQWDFW:LULQJGLDJUDPIRU1$085VHQVRUZLWKPRQLWRULQJIRUZLUHEUHDNVKRUWFLUFXLW:LULQJGLDJUDPIRUFRQWDFWVFRQQHFWLRQYDULDQWV&RQWDFWZLWK0RQLWRULQJIRUZLUHEUHDNOLQHVKRUWFLUFXLWRQO\LIUHVLVWDQFHGLUHFWO\RQFRQWDFW&KDQQHOQXPEHUVWDWXVLQGLFDWLRQ>JUHHQ@6)JURXSIDXOW>UHG@)FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@9999999,QSXWb,QSXWb,QSXWb,QSXWb

Image 2-1 Wiring diagram of digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation

You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed

configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location.

In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing

panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module.

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure

In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line

chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 55

Block diagram SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

/09NNNNNNN9ORDGYROWDJH6HQVRUVXSSO\&KDQQHO&RQWDFWZLWKRXWPRQLWRULQJ0RQLWRULQJ/PRGXOH0RQLWRULQJLQWHUQDOVXSSO\YROWDJH6WDWXV(UURU/RJLF/RJLF6EDFNSODQHEXV(YDOXDWLRQ&KDQQHOIDXOWGLVSOD\))UHG6WDWXVGLVSOD\JUHHQ*URXSHUURUGLVSOD\6)UHG&RQWDFWZLWKPRQLWRULQJIRUZLUHEUHDNUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWHGGLUHFWO\WRFRQWDFW&RQWDFWZLWKPRQLWRULQJIRUZLUHEUHDNFRQGXFWRUVKRUWFLUFXLWUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWHGGLUHFWO\WRFRQWDFW1$085VHQVRUPRQLWRULQJIRUZLUHEUHDNFRQGXFWRUVKRUWFLUFXLW&KDQQHO&KDQQHO&RQQHFWLRQYDULDQWV&KDQQHO9999

Image 2-2 Block diagram of the digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Technical specifications of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120

Weight approx. 230 g

Module-specific data

Configuration in Run (CiR) supported yes

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

56 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR They return the process value that

applied before the parameters were

set.

Supports time stamping yes

Number of inputs 4

Line length, shielded max. 200 m

ATEX approvals

II 3 G (2) GD

Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc

Test number KEMA 01ATEX1057 X

FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2,

Group A, B, C, D T4

Class I, Zone 2,

Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials

Bus power supply

Rated load voltage L+

● Reverse voltage protection

5 V DC

24 V DC

yes

Number of inputs which can be activated simultaneously 4

Electrical isolation

● between the channels and backplane bus yes

● between the channels and load voltage L+ yes

● between the channels yes

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

● between the channels and backplane bus DC 60 V

AC 30 V

● between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC

30 VAC

● between the channels 60 VDC

30 VAC

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 60 VDC

30 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

● between the channels and backplane bus 300 VDC

250 VAC

● between the channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC

250 VAC

● between the channels 300 VDC

250 VAC

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 75 VDC

60 VAC

Insulation tested

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+with 2500 V DC

● Channels to each other with 2500 V DC

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 57

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+with 500 V DC

Current input

● from backplane bus

● from load voltage L+

max. 80 mA

max. 50 mA

Module power loss typical 1.1 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status indication

● Inputs green LED per channel

Interrupts

● Process interrupt

● Diagnostic interrupt

Configurable

Diagnostic functions

● Group fault indication red LED (SF)

● Channel fault indication red LED (F) per channel

● Diagnostic functions readout possible

monitoring for

● short-circuit I > 8.5 mA

● Wire break I ≤ 0.1 mA

Safety specifications

(see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1057 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))

Maximum values of input circuits (per channel)

● U0 (no-load output voltage) max. 10 V

● I0 (short-circuit current) max. 14.1 mA

● P0 (load power) max. 33.7 mW

● L0 (permissible external inductance) max. 100 mH

● C0 (permissible external capacity) max. 3 µF

● Um (fault voltage) max. DC 60V

AC 30V

● Ta (permissible ambient temperature) max. 60°C

Data for sensor selection

To DIN EN 60947-5-6 or IEC 60947-5-6

Input current

● at signal "1" 2.1 to 7 mA

● at signal "0" 0.35 to 1.2 mA

Time/frequency

Interrupt conditioning time for

● Interrupt conditioning only max. 250 µs

● Interrupt and diagnostic conditioning max. 250 µs

Input delay (EV)

● Configurable yes

● Nominal value type 0.1/0.5/3/15/20 ms

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

58 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Configuration in RUN (CiR)

If you use the Configuration in RUN function, the following special feature occurs.

SF LED is lit:

If a diagnostic event was pending before you started to reassign parameters, the SF LEDs (on

the CPU, IM or module) may be lit even though the diagnostic event has been cleared and the

module is operating properly.

Remedy:

● Only make new parameter settings when there is no diagnostic event pending on the

module, or

● Inserting and removing modules

Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR)

...can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN

by means of CiR on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

14044916).

See also

The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14)

Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17)

Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20)

2.2.2 Parameterization

Parameterization

You set the parameters of digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR in STEP 7. You must

implement the settings in CPU STOP mode. The parameters set in this way are stored in the

CPU during transfer from PG to S7-300. These parameters are transferred to the digital module

during the status change from STOP-->RUN.

You can also change some parameters in the user program with SFC 55 to 57.

The parameters for the 2 parameterization alternatives are subdivided into:

● static parameters

● dynamic parameters

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 59

The table below shows the characteristics of static and dynamic parameters.

Table 2-1 Static and dynamic parameters of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Parameter can be set with CPU operating status

static Programming Devices STOP

dynamic Programming Devices STOP

dynamic SFCs 55 to 57 in user program RUN

Default settings

The SM 321, DI 4 x NAMUR features default settings for diagnostics, interrupts etc..

These defaults apply to digital input modules which were not parameterized in STEP 7.

Configurable characteristics

The characteristics of the SM 321, DI 4 x NAMUR can be parameterized with the following

parameter blocks:

● Basic settings

● Diagnostics

● Process interrupts

Channel group allocation

The table shows the allocation of the 4 channels to the channel groups of the SM 321; DI 4 x

NAMUR.

Table 2-2 Allocation of 4 digital input channels to the 4 channel groups of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Channel Allocated channel group

Channel 0 Channel group 0

Channel 1 Channel group 1

Channel 2 Channel group 2

Channel 3 Channel group 3

Parameters of the digital input module

The table below provides an overview of the parameters of the SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR and

shows what parameters

● are static or dynamic and

● can be used for the module as a whole or for a channel group.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

60 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Table 2-3 Parameters of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Parameter SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Range of val‐

ues

Default Type of Effective

range

Basic settings

● Input delay (ms)

● Process interrupt enable

● Enable diagnostic interrupt

0.1/0.5/3/15/20

yes/no

static

dynamic

Module

Diagnostics

● Wire-break monitoring

● Short-circuit to M

yes/no

static

Channel

group

Channel

group

Process interrupts

● with leading edge

● at trailing edge

yes/no

dynamic

Channel

group

Channel

group

Input delay

The table below shows the programmable input delay times of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR and

their tolerances.

Table 2-4 Delay times of input signal for SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Input delay Tolerance

0.1 ms 75 to 150 μs

0.5 ms 0.4 to 0.8 ms

3 ms (default) 2.8 to 3.5 ms

15 ms 14.5 to 15.5 ms

20 ms 19 to 21 ms

2.2.3 Diagnostic messages

Introduction

You can use the diagnostic function to determine whether signal acquisition takes place without

errors.

Parameterizing diagnostics

You program the diagnostics functions in STEP 7.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 61

Diagnostic evaluation

We need to distinguish between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

when analyzing diagnostics data. Programmable diagnostic messages such as "wire break"

or "short-circuit to M" are only output if diagnostics data analysis was enabled at the "wire

break" or "short-circuit to M" parameters.

Non-configurable diagnostic messages are general, i.e. independent of parameterization.

A diagnostic signal results in a diagnostic interrupt being triggered providing the diagnostic

interrupt has been enabled by way of parameterization.

Irrespective of the parameterization, known module errors always result in the SF LED and

the corresponding channel fault LED lighting irrespective of the CPU operating status (at

POWER ON).

Exception:

The SF LED and the corresponding channel fault LED light in the event of a wire break only

when parameterization is enabled.

Diagnostics of the digital input module

The table below provides an overview of the diagnostic messages generated by

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR. You enable the diagnostics functions in STEP 7.

The diagnostics information refers to either the channel groups or the entire module.

Table 2-5 Diagnostic messages of SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Diagnostic message Effective range of diagnostics Configurable

Wire break Channel group Yes

Short-circuit to M

incorrect parameters in module

Module

Module not configured

external auxiliary voltage missing

No internal auxiliary voltage

Fuse blown

Time watchdog tripped

EPROM error

RAM error

CPU error

Hardware interrupt lost

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read the system diagnostics data in STEP 7. You can read detailed diagnostic

messages from the module in the user program with SFC 59 of SFC 53.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

62 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Causes of error and remedies

The table below provides a list of possible causes and corresponding corrective measures for

individual diagnostic messages.

However, be aware that error detection must be enabled at the modules in order to output the

relevant programmable diagnostic messages.

Table 2-6 Diagnostic messages as well as their causes and remedies in

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Diagnostic message Possible fault causes Corrective measures

Short-circuit to M

(I > 8.5 mA)

Short-circuit between the two encoder

lines

Eliminate the short-circuit

with contacts as sensor

1 kΩ series resistor not fitted in line to

contact

Connect 1 kΩ resistor

directly at con‐

tact

in line

Wire break

(I ≤ 0.1 m A)

Conductor break between module

and NAMUR sensor

Connect line

with contact as sensor (wire break

monitoring enabled)

10 kΩ resistor not fitted or interrupted

directly at contact

with contact as sensor (without moni‐

toring)

disable channel by parameterization "di‐

agnostics wire break"

Channel not used (open)

Incorrect parame‐

ters in module

Invalid parameters loaded in module

by means of SFC

Check parameterization of module and

re-load valid parameters

Module not config‐

ured

Module not supplied with parameters Include module in parameterization

external auxiliary

voltage missing

No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply

No internal auxiliary

voltage

No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply

module-internal fuse defective Replace module

Fuse blown module-internal fuse defective Replace module

Time watchdog trip‐

ped

partially high electromagnetic interfer‐

ence

Eliminate interference sources

Module defective Replace module

EPROM error

RAM error

CPU error

partially high electromagnetic interfer‐

ence

Eliminate interference sources and

switch CPU supply voltage OFF/ON

Module defective Replace module

Hardware interrupt

lost

The CPU is unable to process succes‐

sive hardware interrupts at this rate

Change interrupt processing in CPU

and reparameterize module if necessary

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 63

2.2.4 Interrupts

Introduction

In principle, a differentiation is made between the following interrupts:

● Diagnostic interrupt

● Process interrupt

Parameterizing interrupts

You program the interrupts in STEP 7.

Default setting

The interrupts are inhibited by way of default.

Diagnostic interrupt

The module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when it detects incoming or outgoing errors such

as a wire break or short-circuit to M, provided this interrupt function is enabled. Diagnostic

functions inhibited by parameterization cannot trigger an interrupt. The CPU interrupts

processing of the user program or low-priority classes and processes the diagnostic interrupt

module (OB82).

Process interrupt

The module supports triggering of process interrupts for each channel at the positive, negative

or both edges of the signal transition, depending on parameter settings. You can determine

which of the channels has triggered the interrupt from the local data of the OB 40 in the user

program.

Active process interrupts trigger process interrupt execution (OB 40) at the CPU, i.e. the CPU

interrupts execution of the user program or of jobs of a lower priority class. If there are no

higher priority classes pending processing, the stored interrupts (of all modules) are processed

one after the other corresponding to the order in which they occurred.

Process interrupt lost

Events (edge transitions) at a channel are written to the process interrupt stack and trigger a

process interrupt. The event is lost if a further event is generated at this channel before the

CPU has acknowledged the process interrupt, i.e. before OB 40 was executed. This status

triggers a "process interrupt lost" diagnostics interrupt. The relevant diagnostics interrupt must

be enabled.

Further events at this channel are not logged until interrupt processing is completed for this

channel.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

64 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Influence of the supply voltage and of the operating state

The input values of the SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR are dependent on the supply voltage and on

the operating status of the CPU.

The table below provides an overview of these dependencies.

Table 2-7 Dependencies of the input values for CPU operating status and supply voltage L+ of SM

321; DI 4 x NAMUR

Operating status

CPU

Supply voltage L+ at digital module Input value of the digital mod‐

ule

POWER ON RUN L+ applied Process value

L+ not applied > 20 ms 0 signal

STOP L+ applied Process value

No L+ 0 signal

POWER OFF - L+ applied -

No L+ -

Failure of the supply voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR is always indicated by the SF-

LED on the front of the module and additionally entered in diagnostics.

In the event of the module supply voltage L+ failing, the input value is initially held for 20 to 40

ms before the "0" signal is transferred to the CPU. Supply voltage dips < 20 ms do not influence

the process value, but are reported by diagnostics interrupt and at the group error LED.

Interrupt-triggering channels

The relevant process interrupt-triggering channel is logged in the OB40_POINT_ADDR

variable of the start information of OB40. The figure below shows the assignment of bits in

DWORD 8 of local data.

Byte Variable Data type Description

6/7 OB40_MDL_ADDR WORD B#16#0 Address of the interrupt-triggering

module

As of 8 OB40_POINT_ADDR DWORD see the fol‐

lowing fig‐

ure

Indication of the interrupt-triggering

inputs

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.2 Digital input module SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR (6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 65

/%/%/%/%/'5HVHUYHG (GJHFKDQJH&KDQQHO(GJHFKDQJH&KDQQHO(GJHFKDQJH&KDQQHO(GJHFKDQJH&KDQQHO%LWQR

Image 2-3 Start Information of OB40: which event has triggered the process interrupt

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7

322-5SD00-0AB0)

2.3.1 Features and technical specifications

Order Number

6ES7322-5SD00-0AB0

Features

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA has the following properties:

● 4 outputs

– electrically isolated from the bus

– electrically isolated from each other

● suitable for

– intrinsically safe valves

– acoustic interrupts

– indicators

● configurable diagnostics

● configurable diagnostic interrupt

● configurable default output

● Status indication (0...3) = green LEDs

Fault indications = red LEDs for

– group fault indication (SF)

– channel-related short-circuit and wire-break error message (F0 to F3)

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

66 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● Intrinsic safety of outputs in accordance with 60079-11

● 2-wire actuator connection

● Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Wiring diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA

&+&+&+&+/06)))))>([LE@,,&[[;6'$%60'2['&9P$&KDQQHOQXPEHUVWDWXVLQGLFDWLRQ>JUHHQ@6)JURXSIDXOW>UHG@)FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@:LULQJGLDJUDP2XWSXW2XWSXW2XWSXW2XWSXW

Image 2-4 Wiring diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation

You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed

configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location.

In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing

panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 67

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure

In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line

chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location.

Block diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA

/099999:LUHEUHDN&KDQQHO&KDQQHO&KDQQHO/RJLF/RJLF6EDFNSODQHEXV&KDQQHO9ORDGYROWDJH6KRUWFLUFXLWWR00RQLWRULQJ/PRGXOH0RQLWRULQJLQWHUQDOVXSSO\YROWDJH(YDOXDWLRQ&KDQQHOIDXOWGLVSOD\))UHG6WDWXVGLVSOD\JUHHQ*URXSHUURUGLVSOD\6)UHG

Image 2-5 Block diagram of digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

68 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120

Weight approx. 230 g

Module-specific data

Configuration in Run (CiR) supported yes

● Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR specify the output value which

was valid before the parameter‐

ization

Number of outputs 4

Line length, shielded max. 200 m

ATEX approvals

II 3 G (2) GD

Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc

Test number KEMA 01ATEX1059 X

FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2,

Group A, B, C, D T4

Class I, Zone 2,

Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials

Bus power supply

Rated load voltage L+

● Reverse voltage protection

5 V DC

24 V DC

yes

Total current of outputs

● horizontal arrangement up to 60 °C no restrictions

● vertical installation to 40 °C no restrictions

Electrical isolation

● between the channels and backplane bus yes

● between the channels and load voltage L+ yes

● between the channels yes

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

● between the channels and backplane bus DC 60 V

AC 30 V

● between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC

30 VAC

● between the channels 60 VDC

30 VAC

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 60 VDC

30 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

● between the channels and backplane bus 300 VDC

250 VAC

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 69

● between the channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC

250 VAC

● between the channels 300 VDC

250 VAC

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 75 VDC

60 VAC

Insulation tested

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+with 2500 V DC

● Channels to each other with 2500 V DC

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+with 500 V DC

Current input

● from backplane bus

● from load voltage L+ (at rated data)

Max. 85 mA

max. 160 mA

Module power loss typical 3 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status indication

● Outputs green LED per channel

Interrupts

● Diagnostic interrupt configurable

Diagnostic functions

● Group fault indication red LED (SF)

● Channel fault indication red LED (F) per channel

● Diagnostic functions readout possible

monitoring for

● short-circuit I > 10 mA (±10%)

● Wire break I ≤ 0.15 mA

Safety specifications

(see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1059 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))

Maximum values of the output circuits (per channel)

● U0 (no-load output voltage) max.25.2 V

● I0 (short-circuit current) max. 70 mA

● P0 (load power) max. 440 mW

● L0 (permissible external inductance) max. 6.7 mH

● C0 (permissible external capacity) max. 90 nF

● Um (fault voltage) max. DC 60V

AC 30V

● Ta (permissible ambient temperature) max. 60°C

Data for sensor selection

Outputs

● No-load voltage UA0

● Internal resistance RI

DC 24 V ±5%

390 Ω ±5%

Curve vertices E

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

70 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● Voltage UE

● Current IE

DC 19 V ±10%

10 mA ±10%

Parallel wiring of two outputs

● for redundant activation of a load not possible

● for increasing power possible

Switching frequency

● at resistive load 100 Hz

● at inductive load (LLo) 100 Hz

Short-circuit protection of the output yes, electronic

● Response threshold Curve vertex E

Block diagram

IRA

URL

RiRL

UA RAURA

UAO

URL

URA

IRA

Generator

Internal resistor

Line resistor

Load resistor

No-load voltage

Output voltage

Voltage drop at load resistor

Output power at load

max. output voltage

Load current

Output characteristic

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 71

Block diagram

85$85/,5$8$28$(,2,8285DQJHRXWVLGHVDIHW\UHOHYDQWOLPLWV2YHUORDGFORFNHG/RDGRXWSXWSRZHU

E Curve vertice (UE, IE)

UE = 19V ± 10%

IE = 10 mA ± 10%

Output current electronically clocked at overload.

Clock ratio ∼ 1:25

Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR)

...can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN

by means of CiR on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

14044916).

See also

The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14)

Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17)

Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20)

2.3.2 Parameterization

Parameterization

You program the parameters in STEP 7. You must implement the settings in CPU STOP mode.

During transfer from the PG to the S7-300, the parameters set in this way are stored in the

CPU and then transferred by the CPU to the digital module.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

72 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Alternatively, you can also change several parameters in the user program with SFCs 55 to

57 (see

STEP 7-online help

The parameters for the 2 parameterization alternatives are subdivided into:

● static parameters

● dynamic parameters

The table below shows the characteristics of static and dynamic parameters.

Table 2-8 Static and dynamic parameters

Parameter can be set with CPU operating status

static Programming Devices STOP

dynamic Programming Devices STOP

SFCs 55 to 57 in user program RUN

Default settings

The digital output features default settings for diagnostics, substitute values, etc..

These defaults apply to digital modules which were not parameterized in STEP 7.

Configurable characteristics

The characteristics of the SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA can be parameterized with the following

parameter blocks:

● Basic settings

● Diagnostics

Channel groups allocation

The table below shows the allocation of the 4 channels to the 4 channel groups of digital output.

Table 2-9 Assignment of the four channels to the four channel groups of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA

and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA

Channel Allocated channel group

Channel 0 Channel group 0

Channel 1 Channel group 1

Channel 2 Channel group 2

Channel 3 Channel group 3

Parameters of the digital output module

The table below provides an overview of the parameters and shows what parameters:

● are static or dynamic,

● can be used for the module as a whole or for a channel group.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 73

Table 2-10 Parameters of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA

Parameter SM 322; DO 4 x DC 24V/10 mA / or 15V/20 mA

Range of val‐

ues

Default Type of Effective

range

Basic settings

● Enable diagnostic interrupt

● retain last valid value

● Switch to substitute value

● Substitute value

yes/no

0 / 1

yes

dynamic

module

Module

Diagnostics

● Short-circuit to M

● Wire break monitoring 1

● Supply voltage fault

yes/no

static

Channel

group

Channel

group

Channel

group

1 If wire break diagnostic enable is not parameterized there will be no indication by the channel fault

LED in the event of a wire break.

2.3.3 Diagnostic messages

Introduction

You can use the diagnostic function to determine whether signal output takes place without

errors.

Parameterizing diagnostics

You program the diagnostics functions in STEP 7.

Diagnostic evaluation

We need to distinguish between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

when analyzing diagnostics data. Programmable diagnostic messages such as "short-circuit

to M" are only output if diagnostics data analysis was enabled at the "wire break" or "short-

circuit to M" parameters.

Non-configurable diagnostic messages are general, i.e. independent of parameterization.

A diagnostic signal results in a diagnostic interrupt being triggered providing the diagnostic

interrupt has been enabled by way of parameterization.

Irrespective of the parameterization, known module errors always result in the SF LED or the

corresponding channel fault LED lighting irrespective of the CPU operating status (at POWER

ON).

Exception:

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

74 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

The SF LED and the corresponding channel fault LED light in the event of a wire break only

when parameterization is enabled.

Diagnostics of digital output module

The table below provides an overview of the diagnostic messages. You enable the diagnostics

functions in STEP 7.

The diagnostic information refers to either the individual channels or the entire module.

Table 2-11 Parameters of SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA

Diagnostic message Effective range of diagnostics Configurable

Short-circuit to M

Channel group

Yes

Wire break

No-load voltage

Module not configured

Module

external auxiliary voltage missing

No internal auxiliary voltage

Fuse blown

Time watchdog tripped

EPROM error

RAM error

CPU error

Wire break detection

A wire break is detected at a current ≤ 0.15 mA.

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read the system diagnostics data in STEP 7. You can read detailed diagnostic

messages from the module in the user program with SFC 59 of SFC 53.

Causes of error and remedies

The table below provides a list of possible causes, marginal conditions for fault recognition

and corresponding corrective measures for individual diagnostic messages.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 75

However, be aware that error detection must be programmed accordingly at the modules in

order to output programmable diagnostic messages.

Table 2-12 Diagnostic messages as well as their causes of error and remedies for the

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA

Diagnostic message Fault recog‐

nition at

Possible fault causes Corrective measures

Short-circuit to M only when

output at "1"

output overload Eliminate overload

Short-circuit between the two

output lines

Eliminate the short-circuit

Wire break only when

output at "1"

Break in line between module

and actuator

Connect line

Channel not used (open) disable channel by parameter‐

ization "diagnostics wire

break"

No-load voltage only when

output at "1"

Failure of internal channel

supply voltage

Replace module

Incorrect parameters

in module

general Invalid parameters loaded in

module by means of SFC

Check parameterization of

module and re-load valid pa‐

rameters

Module not configured general Invalid parameters loaded in

module by means of SFC

Check parameterization of

module and re-load valid pa‐

rameters

external auxiliary volt‐

age missing

general No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply

No internal auxiliary

voltage

general No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply

module-internal fuse defective Replace module

Fuse blown general module-internal fuse defective Replace module

Time watchdog trip‐

ped

EPROM error

CPU error

general partially high electromagnetic

interference

Eliminate interference sour‐

ces and switch CPU supply

voltage OFF/ON

Module defective Replace module

2.3.4 Interrupts

Introduction

The digital output can trigger a diagnostic interrupt.

Parameterizing interrupts

Interrupts can be configured in STEP 7.

Default setting

The interrupts are inhibited by way of default.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.3 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA (6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

76 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Diagnostic interrupt

The module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when it detects incoming or outgoing errors such

as short-circuit to M, provided this interrupt function is enabled. Diagnostic functions inhibited

by parameterization cannot trigger an interrupt. The CPU interrupts processing of the user

program or low-priority classes and processes the diagnostic interrupt module (OB82).

Influence of the supply voltage and of the operating state

The output values are dependent on the supply voltages and CPU operating status.

The table below provides an overview of these dependencies.

Table 2-13 Dependencies of output values on the CPU operating status and supply voltage L+ of SM

322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA and SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA

Operating status

CPU

Supply voltage L+ at digital mod‐

ule

Output value of the digital mod‐

ule

POWER ON RUN L+ applied CPU value

No L+ 0 signal

STOP L+ applied Substitute value / last value

Substitute value for 0-signal is

default setting

No L+ 0 signal

POWER OFF - L+ applied 0 signal

No L+ 0 signal

Failure of the supply voltage is always indicated by the SF LED on the front of the module and

additionally entered in diagnostics.

2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA

(6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)

2.4.1 Features and technical specifications

Order Number

6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 77

Features

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA has the following properties:

● 4 outputs

– electrically isolated from the bus

– electrically isolated from each other

● suitable for

– intrinsically safe valves

– acoustic interrupts

– indicators

● configurable diagnostics

● configurable diagnostic interrupt

● configurable default output

● Status indication (0...3) = green LEDs

Fault indications = red LEDs for

– group fault indication (SF)

– channel-related short-circuit and wire-break error message (F0 to F3)

● Intrinsic safety of outputs in accordance with 60079-11

● 2-wire actuator connection

● Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

78 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Wiring diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA

&+&+&+&+/06)))))[[;5'$%60'2['&9P$&KDQQHOQXPEHUVWDWXVLQGLFDWLRQ>JUHHQ@6)JURXSIDXOW>UHG@)FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@:LULQJGLDJUDP2XWSXW2XWSXW2XWSXW2XWSXW

Image 2-6 Wiring diagram of SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation

You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed

configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location.

In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing

panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module.

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure

In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line

chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 79

Block diagram of the SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA

/099999:LUHEUHDN&KDQQHO&KDQQHO&KDQQHO/RJLF/RJLF6EDFNSODQHEXV&KDQQHO9ORDGYROWDJH6KRUWFLUFXLWWR00RQLWRULQJ/PRGXOH0RQLWRULQJLQWHUQDOVXSSO\YROWDJH(YDOXDWLRQ&KDQQHOIDXOWGLVSOD\))UHG6WDWXVGLVSOD\JUHHQ*URXSHUURUGLVSOD\6)UHG

Image 2-7 Block diagram of digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA

Technical specifications of the SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120

Weight approx. 230 g

Module-specific data

Configuration in Run (CiR) supported yes

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

80 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR return the output value which

was valid before the parame‐

terization

Number of outputs 4

Line length, shielded max. 200 m

ATEX approvals

II 3 G (2) GD

Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc

Test number KEMA 01ATEX1056 X

FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2,

Group A, B, C, D T4

Class I, Zone 2,

Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials

Bus power supply

Rated load voltage L+

● Reverse voltage protection

1. 5 V DC

2. 24 V DC

yes

Total current of outputs

● horizontal arrangement up to 60 °C no restrictions

● vertical installation to 40 °C no restrictions

Electrical isolation

● between the channels and backplane bus yes

● between the channels and load voltage L+ yes

● between the channels yes

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

● between the channels and backplane bus 60 VDC

30 VAC

● between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC

30 VAC

● between the channels 60 VDC

30 VAC

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 60 VDC

30 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

● between the channels and backplane bus 300 VDC

250 VAC

● between the channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC

250 VAC

● between the channels 300 VDC

250 VAC

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ 75 VDC

60 VAC

Insulation tested

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L+ with 2500 V DC

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 81

● Channels to each other with 2500 V DC

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ with 500 V DC

Current input

● from backplane bus

● from load voltage L+ (at rated data)

Max. 85 mA

max. 160 mA

Module power loss typical 3 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status indication

● Outputs green LED per channel

Interrupts

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions

● Group fault indication red LED (SF)

● Channel fault indication red LED (F) per channel

● Diagnostic functions readout possible

monitoring for

● short-circuit I > 20.5 mA (±10%)

● Wire break I ≤ 0.15 mA

Safety specifications

(see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1056 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))

Maximum values of the output circuits (per channel)

● U0 (no-load output voltage) max.15.75 V

● I0 (short-circuit current) max. 85 mA

● P0 (load power) max. 335 mW

● L0 (permissible external inductance) max. 5 mH

● C0 (permissible external capacity) max. 478 nF

● Um (fault voltage) max. 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Ta (permissible ambient temperature) max. 60°C

Data for sensor selection

Outputs

● No-load voltage UA0

● Internal resistance RI

DC 15 V ±5%

200 Ω ±5%

Curve vertices E

● Voltage UE

● Current IE

DC 10 V ±10%

20.5 mA ±10%

Parallel wiring of two outputs

● for redundant activation of a load not possible

● for increasing power possible

Switching frequency

● at resistive load 100 Hz

● at inductive load (L < Lo) 100 Hz

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

82 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Short-circuit protection of the output yes, electronic

● Response threshold Curve vertex E

Block diagram

IRA

URL

RiRL

UA RAURA

UAO

URL

URA

IRA

Generator

Internal resistance

Line resistor

Load resistor

No-load voltage

Output voltage

Voltage drop at load resistor

Output power at load

max. output voltage

Load current

Output characteristic

85$85/,5$8$28$(,2,8285DQJHRXWVLGHVDIHW\UHOHYDQWOLPLWV2YHUORDGFORFNHG/RDGRXWSXWSRZHU

E Curve vertice (UE, IE)

UE = 10 V ± 10%

IE = 20.5 mA ± 10%

Output current electronically clocked at overload.

Clock ratio ∼ 1:25

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.4 Digital output module SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA (6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 83

Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR)

...can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN

by means of CiR on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

14044916).

See also

The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14)

Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17)

Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20)

2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules

Structure and contents of the diagnostic data records

The diagnostics data for a module is stored in data records 0 and 1.

● Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data describing the current status of the

module.

● Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostics data also stored in data record 0, plus

additional module-specific diagnostics data that describe the status of a channel of the

module.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

84 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Byte 0 to 3 (data records 0 and 1)

%\WH%\WH0RGXOHFODVVGLJLWDOPRGXOH&KDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH2SHUDWLQJPRGH&\FOHPRQLWRULQJWULSSHG,QWHUQDOVXSSO\YROWDJHRIWKHPRGXOHIDLOHG581%\WH0RGXOHHUURU,QWHUQDOHUURU([WHUQDOHUURU&KDQQHOHUURUH[WHUQDODX[LOLDU\YROWDJHPLVVLQJ,QFRUUHFWSDUDPHWHULQWKHPRGXOH0RGXOHQRWSDUDPHWHUL]HG6723%\WH3URFHVVRUIDLOXUH(3520HUURU5$0HUURU)XVHEORZQ3URFHVVLQWHUUXSWORVW

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 85

Byte 4 to byte 6 infoblock (data record 1)

Bytes 4 to 6 form the infoblock with the information about channel type, length of diagnostics

information and the length of the channels.

%\WH%\WH&KDQQHOW\SH%'LJLWDOLQSXWPRGXOH%\WH&KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO&KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO&KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO&KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO&KDQQHOW\SH%'LJLWDORXWSXWPRGXOH%\WH1XPEHURIGLDJQRVWLFVELWVWKDWWKHPRGXOHRXWSXWVSHUFKDQQHO%1XPEHURIFKDQQHOVRIWKHVDPHW\SHLQWKHPRGXOH%7KHFKDQQHOHUURUYHFWRULVIROORZHGE\WKHFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFVGDWD%\WHVWR6KRUWFLUFXLWWR0:LUHEUHDNFKDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURUFKDQQHOH[WHUQDODX[LOLDU\YROWDJHPLVVLQJQRWIRU(65'$%

SIMATIC S7 Ex Digital Modules

2.5 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex digital modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

86 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules 3

3.1 Analog value representation

3.1.1 Analog Value Representation of Analog Input and Output Values

Conversion of analog values

The CPU processes the analog values only in binary form.

Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form.

Analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal.

Analog value representation

The digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values with the same rated

range.

The analog values are represented as two's complement.

Table 3-1 Characteristics of Analog Modules

Resolution Analog value

Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit significance sig

214 213 212 211 210 29282726252423222120

sign

The sign of the analog value is always in bit number 15:

● "0" → +

● "1" → -

3.1.2 General information about the display of analog values within the measuring

ranges of analog inputs

Introduction

This section contains the tables of digitized analog values for the measurement ranges of

analog modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 87

Reading measured value tables

The tables represent the digitized analog values of the various measurement ranges of analog

input modules.

As the binary notation of analog values is always the same, these tables only contain a

comparison of measuring ranges with the units.

Measured value resolution

Deviating from this, a Sigma Delta AD converter is used with the analog input modules

described in the

manual

. Irrespective of the configurable integration time, this converter always

makes available the maximum representable 15 Bit +sign. Lower resolution ratings than

indicated in the specifications are due to conversion noise based on the shorter integration

times (2.5, 16/2/3, 20 ms). The different integration times do not influence the numeric notation

of measured values. The number of stable bits is specified in the technical specifications.

The number of stable bits is the resolution at which, despite noise, the "no missing

code"characteristics of the AD converter are guaranteed.

The bits that are no longer stable at shorter integration times are marked with "x" in the following

tables.

Table 3-2 Representation of the smallest stable unit of the analog value

Stable bits (+

sign)

Smallest stable unit Analog value

decimal hexadecimal High-Byte Low-Byte

9 64 40HSign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x x

10 32 20HSign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x x

12 8 8HSign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x

13 4 4HSign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x

15 1 1HSign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Noise-prone bits

At a constant input voltage, noise causes distribution of the supplied value by more than ± 1

digit. In the majority of cases, these "unsteady" values can be used as they are. In any case,

this is the most effective option when subsequent processing has integral action characteristics

(integrator, controller, etc.) in any form whatsoever. If this "unsteady state" is undesirable (e.g.

for displays), you can

● mask out the "x" bits

● round up to "stable" bits

● filter the successive values

When choosing these options, you first have to scan the values in order to prevent any change

or filtering of the coding of invalid measured values (-32768 / 8000H and 32767 / 7FFFH).

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

88 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

3.1.3 Analog value notation of the voltage measurement ranges

Voltage measuring ranges ± 25 mV, ± 50 mV, ± 80 mV, ± 250 mV, ± 500 mV and ± 1 V.

Table 3-3 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (voltage measuring

range)

Measuring ranges Units Location

± 25 mV ± 50 mV ± 80 mV ± 250 mV ± 500 mV ± 1 V decimal hexadec‐

imal

> 29.397 > 58.794 > 94.071 >293.96 >587.94 > 1.1750 32767 7FFFHOverflow

29.397 58.794 94.071 293.96 587.94 1.1750 32511 7EFFHOver‐

range

: : : : : : : :

25.001 50.002 80.003 250.02 500.02 1.0001 27649 6C01H

25.000 50.000 80.000 250.00 500.00 1.0000 27648 6C00H

Rated

range

18.750 37.500 60.000 187.50 375.00 0.7500 20736 5100H

: : : : : : : :

- 18.750 - 37.500 - 60.000 - 187.50 - 375.00 0.7500 -20736 AF00H

- 25.000 - 50.000 - 80.000 - 250.00 - 500.00 - 1.0000 -27648 9400H

- 25.001 - 50.002 - 80.003 - 250.01 - 500.02 - 1.0001 -27649 93FFHUnder‐

range

: : : : : : : :

- 29.398 - 58.796 - 94.074 - 293.98 - 587.96 - 1.1750 -32512 8100H

29.398

<- 58.796 <- 94.074 <- 293.98 <- 587.96 <- 1.1750 -32768 8000HUnder‐

flow

3.1.4 Analog value notation of the current measurement ranges

0 mA to 20 mA and 4 mA to 20 mA current measuring ranges

Table 3-4 Displaying the digitized measured values SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4.... .20mA and AI 2 x 0/4 ... .

20mA HART analog input modules

Measuring

range

from

0 to 20 mA

Measuring

range

from

4 to 20 mA

Units Location

Decimal Hexadeci‐

mal

> 23.515 >22.810 32767 7FFFHOverflow

23.515 22.810 32511 7EFFH

Overrange

: : : :

20.0007 20.0005 27649 6C01H

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 89

Measuring

range

from

0 to 20 mA

Measuring

range

from

4 to 20 mA

Units Location

Decimal Hexadeci‐

mal

20.000 20.000 27648 6C00H

Rated range

14.998 16.000 20736 5100H

: : : :

0.0 4.000 0 0H

<0.0 23.9995 -1 FFFFH

3.800 -345 FEA7H

3.600 -691 FD4DHWire break limit I ≦ 3.60 mA in accordance

with NAMUR 1

: : : Underrange

1.1852 -4864 ED00H

<1.1852 32767 7FFFHUnderflow

0358624 E500H

1 NAMUR limits are evaluated only if wire break diagnostics is enabled. When wire break diagnostics

is enabled, 7FFFH is output if the current value drops below 3.6 mA. If the value increases again to

above 3.8 mA, the wire break signal is canceled and the current value is output again.

2 Negative measured values cannot be acquired. For analog values < 0 mA each display of the digital

measured value of 0 mA remains.

3 If wire break monitoring is not enabled, the measured value can fall to 0 mA and the module returns

E500H.

3.1.5 Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders

Resistance sensor with measurement ranges 150 Ω, 300 Ω and 600 Ω

Table 3-5 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (resistance sensor)

Measuring

range

150 Ω

Measuring

range

300 Ω

Measuring

range

600 Ω

Units Location

Deci‐

mal

Hexa‐

deci‐

mal

> 176.383 > 352.767 > 705.534 32767 7FFFHOverflow

176.383 352.767 705.534 32511 7EFFH

Overrange 1

: : : : :

150.005 300.011 600.022 27649 6C01H

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

90 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Measuring

range

150 Ω

Measuring

range

300 Ω

Measuring

range

600 Ω

Units Location

Deci‐

mal

Hexa‐

deci‐

mal

150.000 300.000 600.000 27648 6C00H

Rated range

112.500 225.000 450.000 20736 5100H

: : : : :

0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0H

(negative values physically not possible)

1 The same degree of accuracy as in the rated range is guaranteed in the overrange.

3.1.6 Analog value representation for the standard temperature range

Standard temperature range of the sensor Pt 100, Pt 200 in accordance with DIN 43760 and IEC 751

Table 3-6 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range

standard; Pt 100, Pt200)

Temperature range

standard 850 °C

Pt 100, Pt 200

in °C

decimal hexadecimal location

> 1300.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1300.0

850.1

13000

8501

32C8H

2135H

Overrange 1

850.0

-200.0

8500

-2000

2134H

F830H

Rated range

-200.1

-240.0

-2001

-2400

F82FH

F6A0H

Underrange2

< -240.0 -32768 8000HUnderflow

1 The characteristic of the Pt 100, Pt 200 sensor is not defined in the overrange. The overrange has

been extended to 1300°C in order to be able to incorporate future technical developments of platinum

thermal resistors (thermistors). It is not possible to specify the accuracy of this range.

2 The characteristic of the Pt 100, Pt 200 sensor is not defined in the overrange. The rise of the char‐

acteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy

of this range.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 91

3.1.7 Analog value representation for the standard temperature range Ni 100

Standard temperature range Ni 100 in accordance with DIN 43760

Table 3-7 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range

standard; Ni 100)

Temperature range

standard

Ni 100

in °C

decimal hex Location

> 295.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow

295.0

250.1

2950

2501

686H

9C5H

Overrange 1

250.0

-60.0

2500

-600

9C4H

FDA8H

Rated range

-60.1

-105.0

-601

-1050

FDA7H

FF97H

Underrange1

< - 105.0 -32768 8000HUnderflow

1 The characteristic of the Ni 100 sensor is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of

the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify

the accuracy of these ranges.

3.1.8 Analog value representation for the climatic temperature range

Climatic temperature range of the sensor Pt 100, Pt 200 in accordance with DIN 43760 and IEC 751

Table 3-8 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range

climatic; Pt 100, Pt200)

Climatic temperature

range

Pt 100, Pt 200

in °C

decimal hex Location

> 325.12 32767 7FFFHOverflow

325.12

276.49

32512

27649

7F00H

6C01H

Overrange 1

276.48

-200.00

27648

-20000

6C00H

B1E0

Rated range

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

92 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Climatic temperature

range

Pt 100, Pt 200

in °C

decimal hex Location

-200.01

-240.00

-20001

-24000

B1E1

A240H

Underrange2

< - 240.00 -32768 8000HUnderflow

1 The same degree of accuracy as in the rated range is guaranteed in the overrange Pt 100, Pt 200

climatic.

2 The characteristic of the Pt 100, Pt 200 sensor is not defined in the overrange. The rise of the char‐

acteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy

of these ranges.

3.1.9 Analog value representation for the climatic temperature range Ni 100

Climatic temperature range Ni 100 in accordance with DIN 43760

The same value range as in the standard range of the Ni 100 sensor applies in the climatic

range Ni 100 only with a higher resolution of 0.01°C instead of 0.1°C.

Table 3-9 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range

climatic Ni 100)

Climatic temperature

range

Ni 100

in °C

decimal hex Location

> 295.00 32767 7FFFHOverflow

295.00

250.01

29500

25001

733CH

61A9H

Overrange 1

250.00

-60.00

25000

-6000

61A8H

E890H

Rated range

-60.01

-105.00

-6001

-10500

E88FH

D6FCH

Underrange1

< - 105.00 -32768 8000HUnderflow

1 The characteristic of the Ni 100 sensor is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of

the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify

the accuracy of these ranges.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 93

3.1.10 Analog value representation for the temperature range type B

Temperature range sensor type B

The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.

Table 3-10 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,

type B)

Temperature range

in °C

Type B

decimal hexadecimal location

> 2070.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow

2070.0

1820.1

20700

18201

50DCH

4719H

Overrange 2

1820.0

200.01

0.0

18200

2000

4718H

7D0H

Rated range

-0.1

-150.0

-1

-1500

FFFFH

FF24H

Underrange2

< -150.0 -32768 8000HUnderflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range

(e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below FA24H the analog input module signals

underflow and outputs 8000H.

1 The module linearizes the range +1820 °C to +200°C for type B. The gradient of the curve deteriorates

below +200°C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the characteristic

curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached.

The characteristic curve of the type B thermocouple does not feature monotone characteristics

in the

temperature range between 0 and 40

C. Values measured in this range cannot be allocated to a specific

temperature.

2 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of

the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the

accuracy of these ranges.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

94 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

3.1.11 Analog value representation for the temperature range type E

Temperature range sensor type E

The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.

Table 3-11 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,

type E)

Temperature range

in °C

decimal hexadecimal location

> 1200.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1200.0

1000.1

12000

10001

2EE0H

2711H

Overrange 2

1000.0

-150.01

-270.0

10000

-1500

-2700

2710H

FA24H

F574H

Rated range

≦-270.1 ≦-2701 ≦F573HUnderrange2

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range

(e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F0C4H the analog input module signals

underflow and outputs 8000H.

1 The module will linearize the range +1000 °C to -150 °C for type E. The gradient of the curve deteri‐

orates below -150 °C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the charac‐

teristic curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached.

2 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of

the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the

accuracy of these ranges.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 95

3.1.12 Analog value representation for the temperature range type J

Temperature range sensor type J

The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.

Table 3-12 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,

type J)

Temperature range

in °C

decimal hexadecimal location

> 1360.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1360.0

1200.1

13600

12001

3520H

2EE1H

Overrange 1

1200.0

-210.0

12000

-2100

2EE0H

F7CCH

Rated range

≦-210.1 ≦-2101 ≦F7CBHUnderrange1

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range

(e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F31CH the analog input module signals

underflow and outputs 8000H.

1 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of

the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify

the accuracy of these ranges.

3.1.13 Analog value representation for the temperature range type K

Temperature range sensor type K

The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.

Table 3-13 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,

type K)

Temperature range

in °C

decimal hexadecimal location

> 1622.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1622.0

1372.1

16220

13721

3F5CH

3599H

Overrange 2

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

96 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Temperature range

in °C

decimal hexadecimal location

1372.0

-220.01

-270.0

13720

-2200

-2700

3598H

F768H

F574H

Rated range

≦-270.1 ≦-2701 ≦F573HUnderrange2

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range

(e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F0C4H the analog input module signals

underflow and outputs 8000H.

1 The module linearizes the range +1372 °C to -220°C for type K. The gradient of the curve deteriorates

below -220°C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the characteristic

curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached.

2 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of

the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy

of these ranges.

3.1.14 Analog value representation for the temperature range type L

Temperature range sensor type L

The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.

Table 3-14 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,

type L)

Temperature range

in °C

decimal hexadecimal location

> 1150.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1150.0

900.1

13500

9001

2CECH

2329H

Overrange 1

900.0

-200.0

9000

-2000

2328H

F830H

Rated range

≦-200.1 ≦-2001 ≦F82FHUnderrange1

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range

(e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F380H the analog input module signals

underflow and outputs 8000H.

1 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of

the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify

the accuracy of these ranges.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 97

3.1.15 Analog value representation for the temperature range type N

Temperature range sensor type N

The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.

Table 3-15 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,

type N)

Temperature range

in°C

decimal hexadecimal location

> 1550.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1550.0

1300.1

15500

13001

3C8CH

32C9H

Overrange 2

1300.0

-220.01

-270.0

13000

-2200

-2700

32C8H

F768H

F574H

Rated range

≦-270.1 ≦-2701 ≦F573HUnderrange2

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range

(e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F0C4H the analog input module signals

underflow and outputs 8000H.

1 The module linearizes the range +1300 °C to -220°C for type N. The gradient of the curve deteriorates

below -220°C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the characteristic

curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached.

2 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of

the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the rated range. It is not possible to specify the accuracy

of these ranges.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

98 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

3.1.16 Analog value representation for the temperature range type R

Temperature range sensor type R

The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.

Table 3-16 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,

type R)

Temperature range

in °C

decimal hexadecimal location

> 2019.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow

2019.0

1769.1

20190

17691

4EDEH

451BH

Overrange 1

1769.0

-50.0

17690

-500

451AH

FE0CH

Rated range

-50.1

-170.0

-501

-1700

FE0BH

F95CH

Underrange1

< -170.0 -32768 8000HUnderflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range

(e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F95CH the analog input module signals

underflow and outputs 8000H.

1 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of

the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized rated range. It is not possible to specify

the accuracy of these ranges.

3.1.17 Analog value representation for the temperature range type S

Temperature range sensor type S

The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.

Table 3-17 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,

type S)

Temperature range

in °C

decimal hexadecimal location

> 1850.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow

1850.0

1769.1

18500

17691

4844H

451BH

Overrange 1

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 99

Temperature range

in °C

decimal hexadecimal location

1769.0

-50.0

17690

-500

451AH

FE0CH

Rated range

-50.1

-170.0

-501

-1700

FE0BH

F95CH

Underrange1

< -170.0 -32768 8000HUnderflow

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range

(e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F95CH the analog input module signals

underflow and outputs 8000H.

1 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of

the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the

accuracy of these ranges.

3.1.18 Representation of the analog values of the temperature range type T

Temperature range sensor type T

The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.

Table 3-18 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,

type T)

Temperature range

in °C

decimal hex Location

> 540.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow

540.0

400.1

5400

4001

1518H

0FA1H

Overrange 2

400.0

-230.0 1)

-270.0

4000

-2300

-2700

0FA0H

F704H

F574H

Rated range

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

100 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Temperature range

in °C

decimal hex Location

≦-270.1 ≦-2701 ≦F573HUnderrange2

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range

(e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F0C4H the analog input module signals

underflow and outputs 8000H.

1 The module will linearize the range +400 °C to -230°C for type T. The gradient of the curve deteriorates

below -230°C to an extent which no longer allows any precise analysis. The rise in the characteristic

curve at this point is retained until underrange is reached.

2 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of

the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the

accuracy of these ranges.

3.1.19 Analog value representation for the temperature range type U

Temperature range sensor type U

The basic values of thermal voltages defined below conform to DIN IEC 584.

Table 3-19 Notation of the digitized measured value of an analog input module (temperature range,

type U)

Temperature range

in°C

decimal hexadecimal location

> 850.0 32767 7FFFHOverflow

850.0

600.1

8500

6001

2134H

0FA1H

Overrange 1

600.0

-200.0

6000

-2000

0FA0H

F830H

Rated range

≦-200.1 ≦-2001 ≦F82FHUnderrange1

In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal, open inputs) or a sensor fault in the negative range

(e.g. incorrect type of thermocouple), when dropping below F380H the analog input module signals

underflow and outputs 8000H.

1 The characteristic of the thermocouple is not defined in the overrange and underrange. The rise of

the characteristic curve is retained on leaving the linearized range. It is not possible to specify the

accuracy of these ranges.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.1 Analog value representation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 101

3.1.20 Analog Value Representation for the Output Ranges of Analog Outputs

Current output ranges from 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA

Table 3-20 Representation of analog output range of analog output modules (current output ranges)

Output

range

0 to 20 mA

Output

range

4 to 20 mA

Units Location

decimal hex

0.0 0.0 ≥32512 ≥7F00HOverflow

23.515 22.81 32511 7EFFH

: : : : Overrange

20.0007 20.005 27649 6C01H

20.000 20.000 27648 6C00H

: : : : Rated range

0.0 4.000 0 0H

0.0 3.9995

-1 FFFFH

: : Underrange

0.0 - 6912 E500H

0.0 - 6913 E4FFH

: : Underflow

- 32768 8000H

Note

For the analog output SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4 ... 20mA the linearity can be reduced in the overrange

for load impedances > 425 Ω .

3.2 General information on wiring technology

Abbreviations used

The diagrams in the next section show the various options of wiring encoders. The

abbreviations used in the diagrams have the following meanings:

Abbreviation Meaning

IC+ Positive terminal of the constant current output

IC- Negative terminal of the constant current output

M+ Positive measuring line

M- Negative measuring line

UISO Potential difference between the inputs and grounding terminal M

UCM Potential difference between the inputs

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.2 General information on wiring technology

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

102 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Abbreviation Meaning

L + 24 VDC power supply terminal

M 24 VDC power supply ground terminal

P5V Supply voltage of module logic

Minternal Module logic ground

UVElectrically isolated supply voltage of the compensating box

L0+ to L3+ Electrically isolated transducer supply per channel

UMMeasurement voltage

RSMeasuring resistor

UV+; UV- External supply voltage of the transducer

QI0- to QI3- Analog outputs current (output current)

M0- to M3- Reference potentials of the analog output circuit

RLResistance of the load/actuator

UISO Potential difference between the reference potential of channels M0- to

M3-, or between the channels and the M terminal of the CPU

See also

Wiring transducers to analog inputs (Page 103)

Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (Page 106)

Connection of resistance thermometers (e.g. Pt100) and resistance sensors (Page 111)

3.3 Wiring transducers to analog inputs

Transducers

The analog input modules support the connection of different transducers to suit a specific

type of measurement:

● Voltage sensor

● Current sensor as

– 2-wire transducer

– 4-wire transducer

● Resistance sensor

Lines for analog signals

Shielded conductors twisted in pairs are used for the analog signals.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.3 Wiring transducers to analog inputs

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 103

Electrically isolated analog input modules

A galvanic connection of measuring circuit ground M- to CPU ground M does not exist on

electrically isolated analog input modules.

Electrically isolated analog input modules are used if there is any risk of potential difference

VISO developing between reference ground M- of the measuring circuit and CPU ground M.

Take appropriate measures to prevent any overshoot of the permitted potential difference

VISO. Interconnect the reference potential M- of the measuring circuit with reference potential

M of the CPU if the permitted value of VISO is actually exceeded or if you cannot precisely

determine the potential difference. This also refers to unused inputs.

Electrical isolation between channels

The channels are electrically isolated by means of separate power transformers, and the

signals are transferred via optocoupler. This electrical isolation tolerates high potential

differences between the channels. In addition, very good values are achieved with regard to

interference voltage rejection and crosstalk between the channels.

SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA features electrically isolated channels.

To facilitate channel isolation, The SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD is equipped with optical

semiconductor multiplexers that ensure a high common-mode range of UCM ≤ DC 60 V. This

represents a virtually equivalent solution in practical applications.

Higher potential differences can be tolerated if the modules are used to process signals from

the non-Ex area.

Insulated transducers

Insulated transducers are not wired to local ground potential. These transducers can be

operated in electrically isolated mode. Potential differences VCM (static or dynamic) may

develop between the input channels as a result of local conditions or interference. However,

such potential differences may not exceed the permitted value of VCM. If there is a possibility

that the permissible value may be exceeded, the M- terminals of the input channels must be

interconnected.

Interconnect M- of the input channels and M of the CPU if you expect any violation of VISO limits

(inputs to the backplane bus).

The diagram below shows the basic wiring of insulated transducers to an electrically isolated

analog input module.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.3 Wiring transducers to analog inputs

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

104 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

1 2 3

8,620/00000$'839&388,628&00LQWHUQDO

①Insulated transducers

②Logic

③Backplane bus

④Ground bus

Image 3-1 Connection of insulated transducers to an isolated analog input module

Non-insulated transducers

Non-insulated transducers are wired to local ground potential. Potential differences VCM (static

or dynamic) may develop between locally distributed measuring points as a result of local

conditions or interference. Install equipotential conductors between the measuring points in

order to avoid such potential differences.

The diagram below shows the basic wiring of non-insulated transducers to an electrically

isolated analog input module.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.3 Wiring transducers to analog inputs

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 105

00008,62$'80/0&38398,628&08&081

2 3

4 5

0D[0LQWHUQDO

➀ Non-insulated transducers

➁ Logic

➂ Backplane bus

➃ Ground bus

➄ Equipotential conductor

Image 3-2 Connection of non-insulated transducers to an electrically isolated analog input module

See also

Shielding (Page 33)

Using thermocouples (Page 112)

3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x

RTD

Options of wiring thermocouples

The diagrams below show the various options of wiring thermocouples with external or internal

compensation. The potential differences VCM and VISO defined in the relevant chapters also

apply to these circuits.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

106 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Thermocouples with compensation box

All thermocouples that are connected to the inputs of a module and which have the same

reference junction compensate as follows. The thermocouples which use a compensation box

must be of the same type. Each of the thermocouples can be grounded at any arbitrary point.

1 2 3

4 5

7 0000$'8008939˽&+&+&+0

➀ Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple)

➁ Reference junction

➂ Supply conductor (copper)

➃ Logic

➄ Backplane bus

➅ Compensation box with reference junction temperature of 0 °C

➆ Thermocouple

Image 3-3 Wiring of thermocouples with external compensation box to the electrically isolated analog

input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Thermocouples with direct looping-in of compensation box

The compensation box can be directly interconnected with the measuring circuit if the wiring

of all thermocouples is electrically isolated.

Compensation channel CH 7 is thus not required and is now available as additional measuring

input.

The "Thermocouples with linearization and 0°C compensation" type of measurement must be

set for all channels. In doing so, the thermocouples that use a compensation box must be of

the same type.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 107

1 2 3

4 5

7 0000$'8008939˽&+&+&+0

➀ Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple)

➁ Reference junction

➂ Supply conductor (copper)

➃ Logic

➄ Backplane bus

➅ Compensation box with reference junction temperature of 0 °C

➆ Thermocouple

Image 3-4 Wiring of electrically isolated thermocouples to a compensation box and "0 °C

compensation" measurement type with analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Advantages

● When using a compensation box with a reference junction temperature of 0 °C, the voltage

corresponding to the reference junction temperature is subtracted directly.

●Channel 7 can be used as additional measuring channel in this circuit variant.

● The number of connecting cables between the compensation box and the analog input

module is reduced.

● The faults, which are attributed to isolated compensation measurement do not occur.

Conditions

The thermocouples that are routed to the same compensation box must only be grounded

once at one point.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

108 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Thermocouples with temperature compensation at the terminals

All eight inputs of the measuring channels are available if the thermocouples are wired via a

reference junction regulated to 0 °C or 50 °C.

2 3

4 0000$'800

39

&+&+&+0LQWHUQDO

➀ Supply conductor (copper)

➁ Logic

➂ Backplane bus

➃ Reference junction regulated to 0 °C or 50 °C

Image 3-5 Wiring of thermocouples to analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD via a reference

junction regulated to 0°C or 50°C

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 109

Thermocouples with thermal resistor compensation

In this type of compensation, the terminal temperature of the reference junction is determined

by a thermal resistance-type sensor in the climatic range.

1 2

3 4

0000$'839&+&+3W00,&,&,&&+&+390LQWHUQDO0LQWHUQDO

➀ Thermocouple

➁ Supply conductor (copper)

➂ Logic

➃ S7-300 backplane bus

➄ Reference junction e.g. Pt100

➅ Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple)

Image 3-6 Wiring of thermocouples with external compensation by means of thermal resistance-type

sensors (Pt100, for example)

Note

The two last channels (channel 6 and 7) of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x

RTD are used for temperature compensation by means of a thermal resistor.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.4 Connecting thermocouples to the analog input SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

110 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Thermocouples with internal compensation

The internal terminal temperature sensor must be used where thermocouples are wired directly

or via compensating lines to the module. Each channel group can use one of the supported

types of thermocouple independent of the other channel groups.

2 3

0000$'8&+&+390LQWHUQDO

Image 3-7 Wiring of thermocouples with internal compensation to an electrically isolated analog input

module

➀ Thermocouple

➁ Logic

➂ Backplane bus

➃ Internal recording of terminal temperature

➄ Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple)

3.5 Connection of resistance thermometers (e.g. Pt100) and resistance

sensors

Measurement

The values of resistance thermometers and resistance transducers are measured using the 4-

wire technique. The resistance thermometers/resistance sensors are fed a constant current

via terminals IC + and IC. The voltage generated at the resistance thermometers / transducers

is measured at the M+ and M- terminals. This method returns a high accuracy of measurement

results with 4-wire technology.

Lines for analog signals

Shielded lines twisted in pairs are used for analog signals. So as to reduce interference

influence.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.5 Connection of resistance thermometers (e.g. Pt100) and resistance sensors

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 111

When using the 4-wire technique to connect resistance thermometers, wire the constant

current line Ic+ and sense line M+ using one of the twisted pairs, and the second pair for Ic+ / M

+. You will achieve a further improvement if you also twist these two twisted-pair wires with

each other (star-quad).

The potential differences VCM and VISO defined in the relevant chapters also apply to these

circuits.

1 2

00$'8,&,&,&3900,&,&,&&+&+&+&+0LQWHUQDO

➀ Logic

➁ Backplane bus

Image 3-8 Wiring of resistance thermometers to the electrically isolated analog input module SM 331;

AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

For 2- and 3-wire connections you need to insert corresponding bridges between the module

terminals M+ and IC + or M- and IC - . However, certain losses of measurement accuracy must

be expected when using such connections, because you cannot measure the voltage loss at

the relevant feed lines.

3.6 Using thermocouples

Installation of thermocouples

A thermocouple consists of

● the pair of thermal elements (sensors) and

● of the mounting and terminal elements required.

The thermocouple consists of two wire elements made of different metals or metal alloys which

are joint at their ends by soldering or welding. The different material compounds return different

thermocouple types such as K, J or N. The principle of measurement is the same for all

thermocouple types.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.6 Using thermocouples

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

112 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

° C

➀ Measuring point

➁ Thermocouple with positive and negative thermal elements

➂ Terminal

➃ Equalizing conductor (material with same thermal e.m.f. as thermocouple)

➄ Reference junction

➅ Copper conductor

➆ Thermal e.m.f. acquisition point

Image 3-9 Measuring circuit with thermocouple

Operating principle of thermocouples

A difference of the temperature between the measuring point and the free ends of the

thermocouple (terminal) generates a voltage at these electrodes, namely the thermal voltage.

The value of this thermal voltage is determined by the temperature difference between the

measuring point and the electrodes, and by the material combination of the pair of thermal

elements. As the pair of thermal elements always records a temperature difference, the free

ends of the thermocouple always have to be kept at a known temperature in order to determine

the temperature at a measuring point.

Extension to a reference junction

The pair of thermal elements can be extended using compensating lines in order to

interconnect these with a reference which has a known temperature.

The material of the equalizing conductors has the same thermal e.m.f. as the wires of the

thermocouple. The conductors leading from the reference junction up to the analog module

are made of copper.

Using thermostatically controlled terminal boxes

It is possible to use temperature-compensated terminal boxes. Use boxes with reference

junction temperatures of 0 °C or 50 °C when using thermostatically controlled terminal boxes.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.6 Using thermocouples

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 113

Compensation of thermocouples

External or internal compensation can be adopted depending on where (locally) you require

the reference junction.

In the case of external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction for

thermocouples is taken into consideration by means of a compensation box or thermal resistor.

In the case of internal compensation, the internal terminal temperature of the module is used

for the comparison.

External compensation

The temperature of the reference junction can be compensated by means of a compensating

circuit, e.g. by a compensation box.

The compensation box contains a bridge circuit which is calibrated for a certain reference

junction temperature (compensating temperature). The terminal connections for the ends of

the equalizing conductor of the thermocouple form the reference junction.

If the actual reference temperature deviates from the compensating temperature the

temperature-dependent bridge resistance will change. A positive or negative compensation

voltage is produced which is added to the thermal e.m.f.

Compensation boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0 °C must be used for the

purpose of compensating the analog input modules.

A further external compensation option is to record the reference junction temperature with a

thermal resistor in the climatic range (e.g. Pt 100).

The following conditions must be observed:

● External compensation by means of a compensation box can only be carried out for one

specific type of thermocouple. This means that all channels of this module operating with

external compensation must be parameterized for the same type of thermocouple.

Module diagnostic signals "incorrect parameters in module" and "reference channel error"

for the corresponding channels (0..5) in the case of incorrect parameterization.

● The parameters of a channel group apply to both channels of this channel group (e.g. type

of thermocouple, integration time, etc.)

Internal compensation

For the purposes of internal compensation, you can form the reference junction at the terminals

of the analog input module. In this case, you must route the compensating conductors to the

analog module. The internal temperature sensor senses the terminal temperature of the

module. The thermocouples (also different types) connected to the module are compensated

with this temperature.

Note

For the analog input module SM 331; SI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, the compensation box is connected

to terminals 18 and 19. The thermal resistor is connected to terminals 16, 17, 18 and 19 in

order to register the reference junction temperature.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.6 Using thermocouples

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

114 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

3.7 Connecting voltage sensors

Wiring voltage sensors to the electrically isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

1 2

80000$'839&+&+80LQWHUQDO

➀ Logic

➁ Backplane bus

Image 3-10 Wiring of voltage sensors to the electrically isolated analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x

TC/4 x RTD

The potential differences VCM and VISO defined in the chapter "Wiring transducers to analog

inputs" also apply to these circuits.

3.8 Wiring current transducers or measuring transducers to the analog

inputs SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Wiring current transducers as 2-wire and 4-wire transducer

The next section describes the operation of transducers on analog input module SM 331; AI

4 x 0/4...20 mA.

The relevant analog channel supplies the electrically isolated and short circuit-proof transducer

voltage L0+ to L3+ to the 2-wire transducer. The 2-wire transducer converts the input process

variable into a current from 4 mA to 20 mA.

4-wire transducers feature a separate power supply which must be taken from an external PS

module.

The potential differences VCM and VISO defined in the chapter "Wiring transducers to analog

inputs" also apply to these circuits.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.8 Wiring current transducers or measuring transducers to the analog inputs SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 115

2 3

4 5608$'/00,P$/80˽ˏ˲0വ

➀ Transducer power supply

➁ Logic

➂ Backplane bus

➃ e.g. pressure, temperature

Image 3-11 Wiring 2-wire transducers to the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4 .... 20mA and AI 2 x 0/4 ... 20mA HART

analog input modules

2 3

4 56$'/008008P$8Y8Y/0˽ˏ˲വ

➀ Transducer power supply

➁ Logic

➂ Backplane bus

➃ e.g. pressure, temperature

Image 3-12 Wiring 4-wire transducers with external power supply to the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4 .... 20mA

and AI 2 x 0/4 ... 20mA HART analog input modules

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.8 Wiring current transducers or measuring transducers to the analog inputs SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

116 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

3.9 Connecting Loads/Actuators to the Analog Output Module SM 332;

AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Introduction

The analog output modules can be used to supply loads/actuators with current.

Lines for analog signals

Shielded lines twisted in pairs are used for analog signals. So as to reduce interference

influence.

You should ground the shield of the analog lines at both ends. Any potential difference between

the cable ends may cause an equipotential current which interferes with the analog signals.

In this case, the shield should only be grounded at one end of the line.

Electrically isolated analog output modules

Electrically isolated analog input modules do not have a galvanic connection between their

reference ground M0- to M3- and CPU reference ground M.

Electrically isolated analog input modules are used if there is any risk of potential difference d

UISO developing between reference ground M0- to M3- of the analog circuit and reference ground

M of the CPU. Take appropriate measures to prevent any overshoot of the permitted potential

difference VISO. You should always interconnect the terminals M0- to M3- with the M terminal of

the CPU if you expect any overshoot of permitted limits.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.9 Connecting Loads/Actuators to the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 117

Wiring loads to a current output

You must connect loads to an output current at, e.g., QI0 and the reference point M0- of the

analog circuit.

1 2

L+

DAU RL

QI0

M0-

L+

CPU UISO

0/4...20 mA

➀ Backplane bus

➁ Logic

➂ Ground bus

Image 3-13 Connection of loads to a current output of the electrically isolated analog output module

SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

3.10.1 Conversion and Cycle Time of Analog Input Channels

Conversion time

The conversion time is made up of the basic conversion time and additional processing times

for wire break monitoring.

The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method (integral action,

successive approximation or sigma-delta method) of the analog input channel. In the case of

integral action conversion, the integration time is included directly in the conversion time. The

integration time influences the resolution. The integration times of the individual analog

modules are specified in the respective chapter. You set up the conversion functions in STEP

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

118 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Cycle time

Analog-to-digital conversion and the transfer of digitized measured values to memory or to the

S7-300 backplane bus is handled sequentially, i.e. the analog input channels are converted

successively. The cycle time, i.e. the time required until an analog input value has been

converted again, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input channels of

the analog input module. The conversion time is based on channel groups when the analog

input channels are combined in channel groups by means of parameterization. In the analog

input modules SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 2 analog input channels are combined to form one

channel group. You must therefore subdivide the cycle time into steps of 2. You should disable

all unused analog input channels in your STEP 7 program in order to reduce cycle times.

The diagram shows an overview of how the cycle time is made up for an n-channel analog

input module.

&RQYHUVLRQWLPHFKDQQHO&RQYHUVLRQWLPHFKDQQHO&\FOHWLPH&RQYHUVLRQWLPHFKDQQHOQ

Image 3-14 Cycle time of an analog input module

3.10.2 Conversion, Cycle, Transient Recovery and Response Times of Analog Output

Channels

Conversion time

The conversion time of analog output channels includes the transfer of digitized output values

and digital/analog conversion.

Cycle time

In the SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, conversion of the analog output channels takes place in

parallel, i.e. on receipt of the data, all four analog output channels are converted

simultaneously.

The cycle time, i.e. the time required until an analog output value is re-converted, is constant

and equals the conversion time.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 119

Transient recovery time

The transient recovery time (t2 to t3), i.e. the time from applying the converted value up to

achieving the specified value at the analog output is dependent on load. In this context we

have to distinguish between resistive, capacitive and inductive loads.

Response time

In the most unfavorable case, the response time (t1 to t3), i.e. the time from receiving the digital

output values in the module up to obtaining the specified value at the analog output is the sum

of the cycle time and transient recovery time. The most unfavorable case is when channel

conversion begins just before transfer of a new output value.

The digitized output values are connected simultaneously to all output channels.

t1t2t3

tAResponse time

tZCycle time

tETransient recovery time

t1New digitized output value applied

t2Output value accepted and converted

t3Specified output value obtained

Image 3-15 Response time of the analog input channels

3.10.3 Parameters of Analog Modules

Parameterization

You program the parameters of analog modules in STEP 7. These settings must then be

transferred in STOP mode to the CPU. During the status change from STOP-->RUN, the CPU

then transfers the parameters to the relevant analog modules.

You can also change some parameters in the user program with SFC 55. You can find out

which parameters can be changed in this way in Appendix A of the S7-300, Modules Device

Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8859629). Call SFC 56 and 57

when the CPU is in RUN in order to transfer the parameters set in STEP 7 to the analog module.

The parameters are subdivided as follows for the 2 parameterization alternatives:

● static parameters and

● dynamic parameters

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

120 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

The table below shows the characteristics of static and dynamic parameters.

Parameter Can be set with CPU operating status

static Programming Devices STOP

dynamic Programming Devices STOP

SFC 55 in user program RUN

Configurable characteristics

The properties of the analog modules can be programmed in STEP 7 at the parameter blocks

listed below:

● for input channels

– Basic settings (enables)

– Limits (process interrupt triggers)

– Diagnostics

– Measurement

● for output channels

– Basic settings

– Diagnostics

– Default values

– Output

Parameters of analog input modules

The tables provide an overview of the parameters for analog input modules and show what

parameters

● are static or dynamic and

● can be set for the modules as a whole or for a channel group or a channel.

Table 3-21 Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Parameter Range of values Default setting Type of param‐

eter

Effective range

Basic settings

Enable

● Diagnostic

interrupt

yes/no no dynamic Module

● Process interrupt

triggered by

violation of limits

yes/no no

● End-of-cycle

process interrupt

yes/no no

Limit

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 121

Parameter Range of values Default setting Type of param‐

eter

Effective range

● Upper limit from 32511 to -35512 32767 dynamic Channel

● Lower limit from -32512 to 32511 -32768

Diagnostics

● Group

diagnostics

yes/no no static Channel group

● with wire break

monitoring

yes/no no

Measurement

● Interference

frequency

suppression

400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10

50 Hz dynamic Channel group

● Measurement

type

- deactivated

- Voltage

- resistor with 4-wire con‐

nection

- thermoresistor (RTD)

with linearization, 4-wire

connection

- Thermocouple with linea‐

rization and compensa‐

tion at 0 °C

- Thermocouple with linea‐

rization and compensa‐

tion at 50 °C

- Thermocouple with linea‐

rization and internal com‐

pensation

- Thermocouple with linea‐

rization and external com‐

pensation 1

Voltage dynamic Channel group

● Range of

measurement

±1V dynamic Channel group

1 This type of measurement supports the following compensations:

● Use of a compensation box

The compensation box must be compatible with the type of thermocouple connected.

All thermocouples must be of the same type.

● Use of a thermal resistor for compensation (e.g. Pt100)

The absolute terminal temperature is determined for compensation with a Pt100 resistor in the climatic

range. In this case, the thermocouples to be compensated can be of different types.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

122 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Table 3-22 Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA

parameter Range of values Default setting Type of parameter Effective range

Basic settings

Enable

● Diagnostic

interrupt

yes/no no dynamic module

● Process

interrupt

triggered by

violation of

limits

yes/no no

● End-of-cycle

process

interrupt

yes/no no

Limit

● Upper limit from 32511 to

-32512

32767 dynamic Channel

● Lower limit from -32512 to

32511

-32768

Diagnostics

● Group

diagnostics

yes/no no static Channel group

● with wire break

monitoring

yes/no no

Measurement

● Interference

frequency

suppression

400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50

Hz; 10 Hz

50Hz dynamic Channel group

● Measurement

mode

4DMU Current (4-

wire transducer)

2DMU Current (2-

wire transducer)

4-wire transducer dynamic Channel group

● Range of

measurement

0...20 mA,

4...20 mA

4...20 mA dynamic Channel group

Parameters of the analog output module

The following table provides an overview of the parameters of the analog output module that

are

● static or dynamic and

● can be set for the modules as a whole or for a channel.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 123

Table 3-23 Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Parameter Range of values Default setting Type of parameter Effective range

Basic settings

● Enable

diagnostic

interrupt

yes/no

dynamic

Module

Diagnostics

● Group

diagnostics

and wire break

monitoring

yes/no

static

Channel

Substitute value

● retain last

value

yes/no no dynamic Channel

● Value -32512...32511 -6912 (0 mA)

Output

● Output mode deactivated

Current

Current dynamic Channel

● Output range 4...20 mA

0...20 mA

4...20mA dynamic Channel

3.10.4 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules

Definition

With the aid of the diagnostics function you can determine whether analog processing is faulty

or free of faults and which faults have occurred. On detecting a fault, the analog modules output

the signal value "7FFFH" irrespective of the parameterization.

Parameterizing diagnostics

You program the diagnostics functions in STEP 7.

Diagnostic evaluation

With regard to diagnostic evaluation, differentiation is made between configurable and non-

configurable diagnostic messages. In the case of configurable diagnostic messages,

evaluation only takes place when diagnostics has been enabled by means of parameterization

("diagnostic enable" parameter). The non-parameterizable diagnostic messages are always

evaluated irrespective of the diagnostic enable.

Diagnostic messages trigger following actions:

● SF LED on analog module lights,

● if applicable channel fault LED,

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

124 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● Transfer of diagnostic message to CPU,

● Diagnostic interrupt triggered (only if diagnostic interrupt has been enabled in the

parameterization).

Diagnostics of the analog input modules

The table below provides an overview of the parameterizable diagnostic messages of the

analog input modules. The enable is set in the "diagnostics" parameter block. The diagnostic

information refers to either the individual channels or the entire module.

Table 3-24 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, AI 4 x

0/4...20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Diagnostic message Effective range

of diagnostics

Configurable

Wire break 1

Channel

Yes

Undershoot of the measuring range Yes,

(group error)

Overshoot of the measuring range

Reference channel fault 2

Incorrect parameters in module No

Incorrect parameters in module

Module

Module not configured

external auxiliary voltage missing 3

internal auxiliary voltage missing 3

Fuse blown 3

Time watchdog tripped

EPROM error 4

RAM error 4

CPU error 4

ADU error 4

Hardware interrupt lost

1 If wire-break monitoring is enabled and a wire break is detected at the 2-wire transducer (4 to 20mA),

the AI 4 x 0 / 4 to 20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART modules output a wire-break message when the

input current drops below I ≤ 3.6 mA (wire-break limit to NAMUR). The wire break message is only

deactivated (hysteresis), when the input current rises above 3.8 mA again.

In the case of the module AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD the line is checked by connecting a test current if wire

break diagnostics is enabled.

2 Only for thermocouples with external compensation and compensation fault.

3 Only for AI 4 x 0/4...20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART with 24 volt supply from L+.

4 The tests are conducted during start-up and on-line.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 125

Causes of error and remedies

However, be aware that error detection must be enabled at the modules in order to output the

relevant programmable diagnostic messages.

Table 3-25 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, AI 4 x

0/4...20mA and AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART - their possible causes of fault and remedies

Diagnostic message Possible fault causes Corrective measures

Wire break Break in the line between the mod‐

ule and sensor

Connect line

Channel not connected (open) Deactivate channel group

("Measurement mode" pa‐

rameter)

Undershoot of the measuring

range

Input value below underflow

range, error possibly caused by:

● on AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD ● incorrect type of thermocouple

● Reversal of polarity at the

sensor connection. Incorrect

measuring range setting

● Check type of

thermocouple

● Check connection

terminals

● Configure a different

measuring range

● on AI 4 x 0/4...20mA ● Module does not report

measuring range undershoot

● Sensor connected with reverse

polarity; (a digitized value is

output for 0 mA)

Overshoot of the measuring range Input value exceeds overflow

range

Configure a different measur‐

ing range

Reference channel fault A different sensor type is set as

reference channel in the measur‐

ing channels parameters

Parameterize different type

of sensor

Reference channel error (wire

break, for example. All measuring

channels values are 7FFFH

Eliminate fault in reference

channel

Incorrect parameters in module Module supplied with invalid pa‐

rameters

Check parameterization of

module and re-load valid pa‐

rameters

Module not configured Module not supplied with parame‐

ters

Include module in parameter‐

ization

external auxiliary voltage missing No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply

No internal auxiliary voltage No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply

module-internal fuse defective Replace module

Fuse blown module-internal fuse defective Replace module

Time watchdog tripped partially high electromagnetic in‐

terference

Eliminate interference sour‐

ces

Module defective Replace module

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

126 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Diagnostic message Possible fault causes Corrective measures

EPROM error

RAM error

CPU error

ADU error

partially high electromagnetic in‐

terference

Eliminate interference sour‐

ces and switch CPU supply

voltage OFF/ON

Module defective Replace module

Hardware interrupt lost The CPU is unable to process suc‐

cessive hardware interrupts (viola‐

tion of limits, end-of-cycle inter‐

rupts) at this rate

Change interrupt processing

in CPU and reparameterize

module if necessary

Diagnostics of the analog output module

Table 3-26 Diagnostic message of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA

Diagnostic message Effective range of diagnostics configurable

Wire break 2Channel group Yes

incorrect parameters in module No

incorrect parameters in module

Module

Module not configured

No internal auxiliary voltage

external auxiliary voltage missing

Fuse blown

Time watchdog tripped

EPROM error 1

RAM error 1

CPU error 1

1 The tests are conducted during start-up and on-line.

2 Wire break recognition at output values I > 100 µA

and

output voltage > 12V

Causes of error and remedies

However, be aware that error detection must be enabled at the modules in order to output the

relevant programmable diagnostic messages.

Table 3-27 Diagnostic messages of analog output module SM 332; AO 4x0/4...20mA and their

possible causes and remedies

Diagnostic message Possible fault causes Corrective measures

Wire break Break in line between module

and actuator

Connect line

Voltage at load resistor > 12V Lower load resistance to ≤500 Ω

Channel not connected (open) Deactivate channel ("Measure‐

ment mode" parameter)

incorrect parameters in module Module supplied with invalid pa‐

rameters

Check parameterization of mod‐

ule and re-load valid parameters

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 127

Diagnostic message Possible fault causes Corrective measures

Module not configured Module not supplied with param‐

eters

Include module in parameteriza‐

tion

external auxiliary voltage missing No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply

No internal auxiliary voltage No module supply voltage L+ Provide L+ supply

module-internal fuse defective Replace module

Fuse blown module-internal fuse defective Replace module

Time watchdog tripped partially high electromagnetic in‐

terference

Eliminate interference sources

Module defective Replace module

EPROM error

CPU error

RAM error

partially high electromagnetic in‐

terference

Eliminate interference sources

and switch CPU supply voltage

OFF/ON

Module defective Replace module

Reading out diagnostic messages

You can read detailed diagnostic messages in STEP 7 by enabling the diagnostics functions

at the analog modules.

See also

Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 120)

3.10.5 Interrupts of analog modules

Types of interrupts

In principle, a differentiation is made between the following interrupts:

● Diagnostic interrupt

● Process interrupt

Parameterizing interrupts

You program the interrupts in STEP 7.

Default setting

The interrupts are inhibited by way of default.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

128 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Diagnostic interrupt

The module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when it detects incoming or outgoing errors such

as a wire break or short-circuit to M, provided this interrupt function is enabled. Diagnostic

functions inhibited by parameterization cannot trigger an interrupt. The CPU interrupts

processing of the user program or low-priority classes and processes the diagnostic interrupt

module (OB82).

Process interrupt

The working range is defined by programming a high and low limit. The module triggers a

process interrupt if the process signal, such as the temperature of an analog signal module,

is out of this working range, provided limit value interrupts are enabled. The interrupt-triggering

channel can be identified based on the local data of OB 40 in the user program.

Active process interrupts trigger process interrupt execution (OB 40) at the CPU, i.e. the CPU

interrupts execution of the user program or of jobs of a lower priority class. If there are no

higher priority classes pending processing, the stored interrupts (of all modules) are processed

one after the other corresponding to the order in which they occurred.

Process interrupt lost

Channel events such as overshoot/undershoot of limits are saved to memory and trigger a

process interrupt. The event is lost if a further event is generated at this channel before the

CPU has acknowledged the process interrupt, i.e. before OB 40 was executed. This status

triggers a "process interrupt lost" diagnostics interrupt. The relevant diagnostics interrupt must

be enabled.

Further events at this channel are not logged until interrupt processing is completed for this

channel.

Structure of the start information tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40

The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start information of OB

40 in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The figure below shows the assignment of bits in word 8

of local data.

Byte Variable Data type Description

6/7 OB40_MDL_ADDR WORD B#16#0 Address of the interrupt-triggering

module

As of 8 OB40_POINT_ADDR DWORD see the follow‐

ing figure

Indication of the interrupt-triggering

inputs

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 129

/%9LRODWLRQRIORZOLPLWRIFKDQQHO9LRODWLRQRIORZOLPLWRIFKDQQHO9LRODWLRQRIKLJKOLPLWRIFKDQQHO9LRODWLRQRIKLJKOLPLWRIFKDQQHO/%/'5HVHUYHG %LWQR/%/%

Image 3-16 Start Information of OB40: Which event has violated limits and triggered a hardware

interrupt

A hardware interrupt programmed to be triggered at the end of scan cycles allows you to

synchronize a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module. A scan cycle includes

the conversion of the measured values of all active channels of the analog input module. The

module processes the channels in succession. When all measured values are successfully

converted, the module reports the existence of new measurement data at its channels to the

CPU by means of an interrupt.

With an end-of-cycle interrupt, bits 20 ... 23 and 28 ... 31 are set to 1. You can always use this

interrupt to load the actual, converted analog values.

3.10.6 Characteristics of Analog Modules

Influence of the supply voltage and of the operating state

The input and output values of the analog modules are dependent on the supply voltage of

the analog module and on the operating status of the CPU.

Table 3-28 Dependencies of analog input/output values on the CPU operating status and the supply

voltage L+

CPU operating

status

Supply voltage

L+ at analog

module

Parameters of analog input

modules

Output value of the

analog output module

POW‐

ER ON

RUN L+ applied Process value CPU value

7FFFH up to first conversion af‐

ter switching on or after module

parameterization has been

completed

Up to first conversion ...

●after switch-on has been

completed if signal of 0 mA

is output.

●after parameterization has

been completed, previous

value is output.

No L+ Overflow value 1 0 mA

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

130 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

CPU operating

status

Supply voltage

L+ at analog

module

Parameters of analog input

modules

Output value of the

analog output module

POW‐

ER ON

STOP L+ applied Process value Default/last value

at 0...20 mA: 0 mA default at

4...20 mA: 4 mA default

7FFFH up to first conversion af‐

ter switching on or after module

parameterization has been

completed

No L+ Overflow value 1 0 mA

POW‐

ER OFF

- L+ applied - 0 mA

No L+ - 0 mA

1 only applies to SM 331; AI 8xT C/4 x RTD as no L+ supply voltage is required.

Failure of the L+ supply voltage for the analog modules is always indicated by the group fault

LED on the module and additionally entered in diagnostics.

Triggering of a diagnostic interrupt is dependent on the parameterization.

Table 3-29 Characteristics of analog modules dependent on the position of analog input value in value

range

The process value lies

within the

Input value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt Channel

fault LED

Rated range Process value - - - -

Overrange/ underrange Process value - - - -

Overflow 7FFFHlit Entry made 1Diagnostic

interrupt 1

lit

Underflow 8000Hlit lit

Wire break 7FFFHlit 1lit 1

outside parameterized

limit

Process value - - Process in‐

terrupt1, 2

1 depending on parameterization

2 An active diagnostics error prevents the limit value process interrupt.

Example: An enabled wire break diagnostics renders limits below the wire break threshold ineffective.

Impact of the range of values on the output

The characteristics of the output modules depend on what part of the value range the output

values are in.

Table 3-30 Characteristics of analog modules dependent on position of analog output value in value

range

Output value in Output value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt Channel

fault LED

Rated range CPU value - - - -

Overrange/ underrange CPU value - - - -

Overflow 0 mA - - - -

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 131

Output value in Output value SF LED Diagnostics Interrupt Channel

fault LED

Wire break CPU value lit 1Entry

made 1

Entry

made 1

lit 1

1 depending on parameterization

Influence of errors

Faults occurring in analog modules with diagnostic capabilities and corresponding

parameterization result in diagnostic entry and diagnostic interrupt. Refer to the respective

chapter for a list of faults.

The SF LED and, if applicable, the channel fault LED light on the analog module.

Faults which cannot be parameterized in diagnostics (e.g. fuse blown) result in an entry being

made in the diagnostic range and the fault LED lighting irrespective of the CPU operating status.

See also

Diagnostics of the Analog Modules (Page 124)

Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 120)

3.10.7 Diagnostic data records of the S7 Ex analog modules

Structure and contents of the diagnostic data records

The diagnostics data for a module is stored in data records 0 and 1:

● Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data describing the current status of the

module.

● Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostics data also stored in data record 0, plus

additional module-specific diagnostics data that describe the status of a channel of the

module.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

132 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Byte 0 to byte 3 (data records 0 and 1)

%\WH%\WH0RGXOHFODVVDQDORJPRGXOH&KDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH2SHUDWLQJPRGH&\FOHPRQLWRULQJWULSSHG,QWHUQDOVXSSO\YROWDJHRIWKHPRGXOHIDLOHG581%\WH0RGXOHHUURU,QWHUQDOHUURU([WHUQDOHUURU&KDQQHOHUURUH[WHUQDODX[LOLDU\YROWDJHPLVVLQJRQO\IRU(65'$%,QFRUUHFWSDUDPHWHULQWKHPRGXOH0RGXOHQRWSDUDPHWHUL]HG6723%\WH3URFHVVRUIDLOXUH(3520HUURU5$0HUURU)XVHEORZQ3URFHVVLQWHUUXSWORVWQRWIRU(65'$%$'&'$&HUURU

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 133

Byte 4 to byte 6 infoblock (data record 1)

Bytes 4 to 6 form the infoblock with the information about channel type, length of diagnostics

information and the length of the channels.

%\WH%\WH&KDQQHOW\SH%$QDORJLQSXWPRGXOH&KDQQHOW\SH%$QDORJRXWSXWPRGXOH1XPEHURIGLDJQRVWLFVELWVWKDWWKHPRGXOHRXWSXWVSHUFKDQQHO%%RQO\IRU(66)$%%\WH%RQO\ZLWK(65'$%DQG(65'$%1XPEHURIFKDQQHOVRIWKHVDPHW\SHRIWKHPRGXOH&KDQQHOHUURUYHFWRU&KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO&KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO%\WH&KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHO&KDQQHOIDXOWFKDQQHORQO\IRU(66)$%RQO\IRU(65'$%DQG(65'$%

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.10 Basic Requirements for the Use of Analog Modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

134 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

7KHFKDQQHOHUURUYHFWRULVIROORZHGE\WKHFKDQQHOVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFVGDWD%\WHVWR3DUDPHWHUL]DWLRQHUURU:LUHEUHDNFKDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURUQRWIRU(65'$%%\WHVWRRU%\WHVWR3DUDPHWHUL]DWLRQHUURU:LUHEUHDNFKDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURURQO\IRU(65'$%DQG(66)$%5HIHUHQFHFKDQQHOIDXOW8QGHUIORZ2YHUIORZ

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

(6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

Order Number

6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0

Features

Properties of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD:

● 8 inputs in 4 channel groups

● Measured value resolution, can be adjusted separately at each channel group, depending

on the settings of interference frequency suppression

– 9 Bit + sign (integration time 2.5 ms) ≙ 400 Hz

– 12 Bit + sign (integration time 162/3 / 20 ms) ≙ 60/50 Hz

– 15 Bit + sign (integration time 100 ms) ≙ 10 Hz

● Mode of measurement, selectable for each channel group:

– Voltage

– Resistance

– Temperature

● user-specific measurement range per channel group

● configurable diagnostics

● configurable diagnostic interrupt

● 2 channels with limit monitoring

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 135

● configurable limit interrupt

● electrically isolated from the CPU

● Common mode < 60 V between the channels

● Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Resolution

The resolution of the measured value is directly proportional to the integration time selected,

i.e. longer integration times at an analog input channel increase resolution accuracy of the

measured value.

Wiring diagram

View and wiring diagram of analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

0000$'86)&+0&+0,&&+0,&0&+0&+000&+,&,&000&+0&+0,&&+0,&0&+0&+000&+,&0,&;6)))))))))60$,[7&[57'[)>7&@)>57'@6)$%)9LQWHUQDO0LQWHUQDOElectrical isolation

SF group fault display [red]

channel-specific fault displays [red]

+ Input 0/0

- Input 0/0

+ Input 1/-

- Input 1/-

+ Input 2/2

- Input 2/2

+ Input 3/-

- Input 3/-

+ Input 4/4

- Input 4/4

+ Input 5/-

- Input 5/-

+ Input 6/6

- Input 6/6

+ Input 7/-

- Input 7/-

Internal

supply

Internal

compensation

Thermocouples, voltage

measurement

Resistance

measurement

Opto-

multiplexer

Electrical isolation

Current

source

Logic and

backplane bus

interface

Image 3-17 Module view and block diagram of SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

136 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation

You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed

configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location.

In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing

panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module.

Notes on the module

An external voltage supply L+ (24V) is not required for the analog input module SM 331; AI 8

x TC/4 x RTD.

If thermal resistors (e.g. Pt100) are used for external compensation, connect them to channels

6 and 7.

If a compensation box is used for external compensation, connect it to channel 7.

Notes on the front connector

You can use the front connector 6ES7392-1AJ20-0AA0 only for the analog input module

6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0.

If you use a front connector, you attain a higher accuracy of temperature measurements with

thermocouples in the measurement mode "Internal compensation". The accuracy of the

internal reference junction temperature is ± 1.5 K when this front connector is used at ambient

temperatures from 0 to 60 °C.

You can connect lines of 0.25 mm2 to 1 mm2.

The use of this front connector results in no restrictions regarding the licenses of the module.

Alternatively, you can use the front connector 6ES7392-1AJ00-0AA0, but without the

increased accuracy.

Parameterization

The functions of the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD are set

● with STEP 7 (refer to the STEP 7 online help), or

● in the user program with SFCs.

Default settings

The analog input module features default settings for integration time, diagnostics, interrupts

etc..

These defaults apply to modules which were not reprogrammed in STEP 7.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 137

Channel groups

In the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 2 analog input channels are combined

to form one channel group. Parameters can always only be assigned to one channel group,

i.e. parameters which are specified for a channel group are always valid for both channels of

this channel group.

Table 3-31 Allocating analog input channels of the SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD to channel groups

Channel Allocated channel group

Channel 0 Channel group 0

Channel 1

Channel 2 Channel group 1

Channel 3

Channel 4 Channel group 2

Channel 5

Channel 6 Channel group 3

Channel 7

Special feature of resistant measurement

Only one channel per channel group is required for the "resistance measurement". The "2nd"

of the group is used for current sinking (IC).

With access to the "1st" to read the measured value. The "2nd" channel of the group is preset

with the overflow value "7FFFH".

During diagnostics, the 1st channel provides the actual status (in compliance with

parameterization) and the 2nd channel "free of faults".

Non-connected input channels

You must short-circuit activated and non-connected channels of the analog input module

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD. This way you ensure optimum interference immunity for the analog

input module. Deactivate all non-connected channels in STEP 7 in order to reduce module

cycle times.

Configurable measuring modes

You can set the following measuring modes on the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/

4 x RTD, make the setting in STEP 7.

● Voltage measurement

● Resistance measurement

● Temperature measurement

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

138 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Supported ranges of measurement

The measuring ranges for which you can use the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/

4 x RTD can be found in the following tables. Define the relevant ranges of measurement in

STEP 7.

Wire-break monitoring

The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD carries out wire-break monitoring for all

ranges if it is enabled via parameterization. The four wires used in resistance thermometer

mode (RTD) are monitored for wire break.

Voltage measurement ranges

measurement mode

selected

Explanation Measuring range

Voltage The digitalized analog values can be found in chapter

Analog Representation for Voltage Measuring Ranges

of Analog Inputs (Page 89).

± 25 mV

± 50 mV

± 80 mV

± 250 mV

± 500 mV

± 1 V

Resistance measurement ranges

measurement mode

selected

Explanation Measuring range

Resistor

4-wire connection

The digitized analog values are listed in the chapter

Analog value representation of the measurement rang‐

es of resistance sensors (Page 90).

150 ohms

300 ohms

600 ohms

Connectable types of thermocouple

The linearization of characteristic curves is specified for thermocouples in accordance with

DIN IEC 584.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 139

For thermal resistor measurements, linearization of the characteristic curves is based on DIN

43760 and IEC 751.

Table 3-32 Connectable thermocouples and thermal resistors

Measurement type Explanation Measuring range

● Linearization and compensation at

0 °C

The digitized analog values for the

thermocouples listed are found in

the chapter Analog value repre‐

sentation (Page 87).

(one unit corresponds to 0.1 °C)

Type T [Cu-CuNi]

Type U [Cu-CuNi]

Type E [NiCr-CuNi]

Type J [Fe-CuNi]

Type L [Fe-CuNi]

Type K [NiCr-Ni]

Type N [NiCr-SiNiSi]

Type R [Pt13Rh-Pt]

Type S [Pt10Rh-Pt]

Type B [Pt30Rh-Pt6Rh]

● Linearization and compensation at

50 °C

● Linearization and compensation

internal comparison 1

● Linearization and compensation

external comparison 2

Thermal resistance+

Linearization, 4-wire connection (tem‐

perature measurement)

The digitized analog values for the

thermal resistors listed are found

in the chapter Analog value repre‐

sentation (Page 87).

Pt100, Pt200, Ni 100

standard range

Pt100, Pt200, Ni 100 cli‐

matic range

1 In the case of internal compensation in the module, all 8 channels are available for temperature

measurements also with different times of thermocouples.

● The module returns the terminal temperature when the input is short-circuited.

This does not apply to thermocouple type B, which is not suitable for measurements in the ambient

temperature range.

2 This type of measurement supports the following compensations:

● Use of a compensation box

The compensation box must be compatible with the type of thermocouple connected. Terminated at

channel 7.

● Use of thermal resistors in climatic range (e.g. Pt100) for compensation.

The absolute terminal temperature is determined in the climatic range with a thermal resistor (e.g. Pt

100) for compensation purposes. In this case, the thermocouples to be compensated can be of different

types.

Terminated at channels 6 and 7.

technical specifications

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120

Weight approx. 210 g

Module-specific data

Configuration in Run (CiR) supported yes

● Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR They return the value that applied be‐

fore the parameters were set.

Number of inputs

● with resistance sensor

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

140 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Line length, shielded max. 200 m

max. 50 m for

voltage ranges ≤ 80 mV and thermocou‐

ples

ATEX approvals

II 3 G (2) GD

Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc

Test number KEMA 01ATEX1061 X

FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2,

Group A, B, C, D T4

Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials

Bus power supply 5 V DC

Electrical isolation

● between the channels and backplane bus yes

● between the channels no

Permitted potential difference of signals of the Ex area

● between the channels and backplane bus (UISO)60 V DC

30 V AC

● between the channels (UCM)60 V DC

30 V AC

Insulation tested

● Channels with respect to backplane bus with 2500 V DC

Current input from backplane bus max. 120 mA

Module power loss typical 0.6 W

Permitted potential difference of signals of the non-Ex area

● between the channels and backplane bus (UISO)300 V DC

250 V AC

● between the channels (UCM)75 V DC

60 V AC

Safety specifications

(see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1061 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))

Maximum values per channel for thermocouples and thermal resistors

● U0(no-load output voltage) max. 5.9 V

● I0(short-circuit current) max. 28.8 mA

● P0(load power) max. 41.4 mW

● L0(permissible external inductance) max. 40 mH

● C0(permissible external capacity) max. 43 µF

● Um(error voltage) max. 60 VDC

30 V AC

● Ta(permissible ambient temperature) max. 60°°C

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 141

Connection of active encoders with the following limit values

Ui = ± 1.2V

Ii = 20 mA

deviating from the above-specified values

● L0(permissible external inductance) max. 15 mH

● C0(permissible external capacity) max. 14.6 µF

Analog value formation

Principle of measurement SIGMA-DELTA

Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel)

● Configurable

● Integration time in ms

yes

2.5

yes

162/3

yes

100

● Basic conversion time =

● 3 x integration time +

● Transient recover time optomultiplexer in ms

7.5

2.5

300

2.5

● additional conversion time for wire break recognition in

2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5

● Resolution in bit (incl. overrange) 9+sign 12+sig

12+sign 15+sign

● Interference voltage suppression for interference

frequency f1 in Hz

400 60 50 10

Interference suppression, error limits

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 ± 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency)

● Common-mode rejection (UISO < 60 V) > 130 dB

● Normal-mode rejection (interference peak value < rated

value of input range)

> 40 dB

Crosstalk attenuation between inputs (UISO < 60 V) > 70 dB

Operational limit (in total temperature range, referred to input range)

● ± 25 mV

● ± 50 mV

● ± 80 mV

● ±250 mV/±500 mV/±1V

± 0.09 %

± 0.06 %

± 0.05%

± 0.04%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C, referred to input range)

● ± 25 mV

● ± 50 mV

● ± 80 mV

● ±250 mV/±500 mV/±1V

± 0.018%

± 0.014%

± 0.011%

± 0.008%

Temperature error (referred to input range)

● ± 25 mV

● ± 50 mV

● ± 80 mV

● ±250 mV/±500 mV/±1V

± 0.0019 %/K

± 0.0013 %/K

± 0.0011 %/K

± 0.0010 %/K

Linearity error (referred to input range) ± 0.003%

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

142 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25 °C, referred to

input range)

± 0.003%

The accuracy of temperature measurement with

external

compensation with thermal resistors

is derived from:

● Error for the analog input of the type

of thermocouple used

● Accuracy 1 of the type of thermal

resistor used for compensation

● Error 1 of the compensation input

The accuracy of temperature measurement with

external

compensation with compensation box

is derived from:

● Error for the analog input of the type

of thermocouple used

● Accuracy 1 of the compensation box

● Error 1 of the compensation input

The accuracy of temperature measurement with

compensa‐

tion of the external reference junction maintained at 0 °C /

50 °C

is derived from:

● Error for the analog input of the type

of thermocouple used

● Accuracy 1 of the reference junction

temperature

The accuracy of temperature measurement with

internal

compensation (terminal temperature)

results from:

● Error for the analog input of the type

of thermocouple used

● Accuracy 1 of the internal reference

junction temperature ± 2.5 K (in the

range 0 to 60 °C

1 Due to the constant increase in the thermocouple characteristic at higher temperatures, the error in

the compensation element is less effective than at temperatures in the vicinity of the compensation

temperature. Exception: Thermocouple types J and E (relative linear progression)

Due to the little increase in the range from approx. 0 °C to 40 °C, the

lack of compensation of the

reference junction temperature

has only a negligible effect in the case of thermocouple type B. Deviation

of measuring temperatures when using thermocouples type B without compensation and measurement

type "0 °C compensation" setting:

700°C and 1820°C < 0.5°C

500 °C and 700 °C < 0.7°C.

"Internal compensation" should be set if the reference junction temperature closely corresponds to the

module temperature. This reduces the error for the temperature range from 500 °C to 1820 °C to < 0.5

°C.

Error limits of analog inputs for thermocouples

(at 25 °C ambient temperature and 100 ms integration time)

Type Temperature range Basic error 1Temperature error 2 [°C/K]

T -150 °C...+400 °C

-230 °C ... -150°C

±0.2K

±1K

± 0.006

U -50 °C...+400 °C

200 °C....-50 °C

± 0.2K

±1K

± 0.006

E -100 °C....+1000 °C

-200 °C....-100 °C

±0.2K

± 1K

± 0.0075

J -150 °C....+1200 °C

-210 °C ... -150 °C

±0.2K

±0.5K

± 0.02

L -50 °C...+1200 °C

-200 °C....-50 °C

±0.2K

± 1K

± 0.02

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 143

Error limits of analog inputs for thermocouples

K -100 °C....+1372 °C

220 °C....-100 °C

±0.2K

± 1K

± 0.018

N -50 °C...+1300 °C

150 °C....-50 °C

±0.2K

± 1K

± 0.025

R +200 °C....+1769 °C

-50 °C...+200 °C

±0.3K

± 1K

± 0.025

S +100 °C....+1769 °C

-50 °C...+100 °C

±0.3K

± 1K

± 0.025

B +700 °C....+1820 °C

+500 °C....+700 °C

+200 °C....+500 °C

±0.3K

±0.5K

±3K

± 0.04

Error limits of analog inputs for thermal resistors

(at 25 °C ambient temperature and 100 ms integration time)

Type Temperature range Basic error 1Temperature error 2 [°C/K]

Pt100 climatic -200 °C....+325 °C ± 0.05K ± 0.006

Pt200 climatic -200 °C....+325 °C ± 0.05K ± 0.006

Ni 100 climatic -60 °C....+250 °C ± 0.05K ± 0.003

Pt100 standard -200° C....+850 °C ± 0.2K ± 0.01

Pt200 standard -200 °C....+850 °C ± 0.2K ± 0.01

Ni 100 standard -60 °C....+250 °C ± 0.1K ± 0.003

Error limits of analog inputs for resistance sensors

(at 25 °C ambient temperature and 100 ms integration time)

Type Resistance sensor Basic error 3Temperature error 2 [°C/K]

150 Ω 0.000 Ω .176.383 Ω ± 0.006% ± 0.001

300 Ω 0.000 Ω .352.767 Ω ± 0.006% ± 0.001

600 Ω 0.000 Ω .705.534 Ω ± 0.006% ± 0.001

1 The basic error includes the linearization error of the voltage temperature conversion and the basic

error of the analog/digital conversion at Tu = 25°C.

2 The total temperature error = temperature error x max. ambient temperature change DTu as a tem‐

perature difference with respect to 25°C .

3 The basic error includes ADC error as a % value of the measuring range at Ta = 25 °C.

The operating error for the use of thermocouples / thermal resistors consists of:

● Basic error of the analog input at Tu = 25°C

● Total temperature error

● Errors which occur due to the compensation of the reference junction temperature

● Errors of the thermocouple / thermal resistor used

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

144 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

The operating error for the use of thermal resistors consists of:

● Basic error of the analog input at Tu = 25°C

● Total temperature error

● Error for the sensor used

Interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

● Limit interrupt configurable channels 0 and 2

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions Configurable

● Group fault indication red LED (SF)

● Channel fault indication red LED (F) per channel

● Diagnostic information readout possible

Data for sensor selection

Input ranges (rated values) / input resistance

● Voltage

± 25 mV

± 50 mV

± 80 mV

± 250 mV

± 500 mV

± 1 V

/10 MΩ

● Resistance 150 Ω

300 Ω

600 Ω

/10 MΩ

● Thermocouples Type:

T, U, E, J, L, K, N, R,

S, B

/10 MΩ

● Resistance thermometer Pt100, Pt200, Ni100 /10 MΩ

Measuring current for thermoresistors and wire-break

checks

c. 0.5 mA

Permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction

limit)

Max. 35 V permanent; 75 V for max. 1 s

(pulse duty factor 1:10)

Connection of signal transducers

● for voltage measurement possible

● for resistance measurement with 4-wire connection,

with 3-wire connection1 with 2-wire connection1

possible

Characteristic linearization Configurable

● for thermocouples ● Type :

T, U, E, J, L, K, N, R, S, B

● for thermal resistors ● Pt100, Pt200, Ni 100 (standard and

climatic range)

Temperature compensation Configurable

● Internal temperature compensation possible

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.11 Analog input module SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD (6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 145

Interrupts, diagnostics

● external temperature compensation with

compensation box

possible

● external temperature compensation with thermal

resistors (e.g. Pt100)

possible

● Compensation for 0 °C reference junction

temperature

possible

● Compensation for 50 °C reference junction

temperature

possible

1 without line resistance correction

Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR)

...can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN

by means of CiR on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

14044916).

See also

Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17)

Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20)

Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 120)

3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA

(6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

Order Number

6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0

Features

Properties of the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA:

● 4 inputs in 4 channel groups

● Measured value resolution, can be adjusted separately at each channel group, depending

on the integration time set

– 10 Bit (integration time 2.5 ms)

– 13 Bit (integration time 162/3 / 20 ms)

– 15 Bit (integration time 100 ms)

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

146 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● Mode of measurement, selectable for each channel group:

– Current

– Channel deactivated

● User-specific measurement range per channel

– 0 ... 20 mA

– 4 ... 20 mA

● configurable diagnostics and configurable diagnostic interrupt

● Channel 0 and 2 with limit value monitoring and configurable limit interrupt

● The channels are electrically isolated from each other, from the CPU, and from load voltage

L+

● The analog inputs are HART-compatible

● Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Resolution

The resolution of the measured value is directly proportional to the integration time selected,

i.e. longer integration times at an analog input channel increase resolution accuracy of the

measured value.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 147

Wiring diagram of SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA

$'86)&+/000&+00&+0&+;5'$%[)/

ZLUHZLUH



ZLUHZLUH



ZLUHZLUH



ZLUHZLUH

0വവ/0/0/0/0വവവ0////00/$,[P$06)))))609LQWHUQDO0LQWHUQDO6)JURXSIDXOWGLVSOD\>UHG@)FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@,QSXWb,QSXWb,QSXWb,QSXWb(OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ/RJLFDQGEDFNSODQHEXV,QWHUIDFHZLUHWUDQVPLWWHUZLUHWUDQVPLWWHU,VRODWLRQDPSOLILHU(OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ

Image 3-18 Module view and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation

You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed

configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location.

In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing

panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module.

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure

In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line

chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

148 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Additional measures

The SM 331-7RD00 (6ES7 331-7RD00-0AB0) module reaches lower safety-relevant technical

data for the connection of active encoders (see the first amendment of the certificate) if the

unused transducer outputs (terminals 3, 7, 12 and 16) are locked with plastic bolts. Use for

example M3 x 8 plastic screws for this (see diagram below).

➀ Load voltage supply

➁ Process connector with screw-type connection

➂ Ex (i) process cable

➃ Intrinsically safe area

➄ Line chamber

➅ Plastic screw M 3 x 8

Parameterization

The functions of the analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA are set

● in STEP 7

● in the user program with SFCs.

Default settings

The analog input module features default settings for integration time, diagnostics, interrupts,

etc. These defaults apply to modules which were not reprogrammed in STEP 7.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 149

Channel groups

The channel group is allocated to each input channel for parameterization of the analog input

module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA. Advantage: You can specify separate parameters for each

channel! The table shows the allocation of the channels to channel groups:

Table 3-33 Allocation of analog input channels of the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA to channel groups

channel Allocated channel group

Channel 0 Channel group 0

Channel 1 Channel group 1

Channel 2 Channel group 2

Channel 3 Channel group 3

Configurable measuring modes

You set up the measurement types in STEP 7. You can set up the following measurement

types:

● Current measurement

● Channel deactivated

Measurement ranges for 2-wire and 4-wire transducers

The table below shows the current measurement ranges for 2-wire and 4-wire transducers.

Define the relevant ranges of measurement in STEP 7.

Table 3-34 Measurement ranges for 2-wire and 4-wire transducers

measurement mode

selected

Explanation Measuring range

2-wire transducer

The digitalized analog values can be found in chapter

Analog Representation for Current Measurement Rang‐

es (Page 89).

from 4 to 20 mA

4-wire transducer from 0 to 20 mA

from 4 to 20 mA

Wire-break monitoring

Wire break recognition is not possible for the current range 0 to 20 mA. For the current range

from 4 to 20 mA, the input current dropping below I x 3.6 mA is interpreted as a wire break

and, if enabled, an appropriate diagnostic interrupt is triggered.

Influencing by HART signals

When implementing transducers with HART protocol, you should preferably program

integration times of 162/3, 20 or 100 ms in order to keep the influence of AC modulation on the

measuring signal to minimum.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

150 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120

Weight approx. 290 g

Module-specific data

Configuration in Run (CiR) supported yes

● Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR They return the process value that applied before

the parameters were set.

Number of inputs 4

Line length, shielded max. 200 m

ATEX approvals

II 3 G (2) GD

Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc

Test number KEMA 01ATEX1060 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2,

Group A, B, C, D T4

Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials

Bus power supply

Rated load voltage L+

● Reverse voltage protection

5 V DC

24 V DC

yes

Transducer power supply

● short circuit-proof

yes

Electrical isolation

● between the channels and backplane bus yes

● between the channels and load voltage L+ yes

● between the channels yes

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L

yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

● between the channels and backplane bus DC 60 V

AC 30 V

● between the channels DC 60 V

AC 30 V

● between the channels and load voltage L+ DC 60 V

AC 30 V

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L

DC 60 V

AC 30 V

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

● between the channels and backplane bus 300 VDC

250 VAC

● between the channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC

250 VAC

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 151

● between the channels 300 VDC

250 VAC

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L

DC 75 V

AC 60 V

Insulation tested

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L

with 2500 V DC

● Channels to each other with 2500 V DC

● Backplane bus with respect to load voltage L+ with 500 V DC

Current input

● from backplane bus

● from load voltage L+

max. 60 mA

max. 250 mA

Module power loss typical 3 W

Safety specifications

(see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1060 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))

Maximum values per channel

● U0 (no-load output voltage) max. 25.2 V

● I0 (short-circuit current) max. 68.5 mA

● P0 (load power) max. 431 mW

● L0 (permissible external inductance) max. 7.5 mH

● C0 (permissible external capacity) max. 90 nF

● Um (fault voltage) max. DC 60V

AC 30V

● Ta (permissible ambient temperature) max. 60°C

Analog value formation

Principle of measurement SIGMA-DELTA

Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per

channel)

● configurable

● Integration time in ms

yes

2.5

yes

162/3

yes

100

● Basic conversion time including integration

time in ms (several channels enabled)

7.5 50 60 300

● Basic conversion time including integration

time in ms (one channel enabled)

2.5 162/320 100

● Resolution in bit + sign (incl. overrange) 10+ sign 13+ sign 13+ sign 15+sign

● Interference voltage suppression for

interference frequency f1 in Hz

400 60 50 10

Interference suppression, error limits

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 ± 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency)

● Common mode interference

between channels and reference ground M of the CPU

(VISO < 60 V)

> 130 dB

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

152 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● Series mode interference (measured value + interference

signal must lie within the 0 mA to 22 mA input range)

> 60 dB

Crosstalk attenuation between inputs (UISO < 60 V) > 130 dB

Operational limit (in total temperature range, referred to input range)

● from 0/4 to 20 mA ± 0.45%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C, referred to input range)

● from 0/4 to 20 mA ± 0.1%

Temperature error (referred to input range) ± 0.01%/K

Linearity error (referred to input range) ± 0.01%

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25 °C, referred to input

range)

± 0.05%

Influence of a HART signal modulated on an input signal relative to the input range

Error at integration time ± 0.25%

● 2.5 ms ± 0.05%

● 162/3 ms ± 0.04%

● 20 ms ± 0.02%

● 100 ms

Interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

● Limit interrupt configurable channels 0 and 2

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions Configurable

● Group fault indication red LED (SF)

● Channel fault indication red LED (F) per channel

● Diagnostic information readout possible

Technical date of the transducer power supply

● No-load voltage

● Output voltage for transducer and cable at a transducer current

of 22 mA

(50 Ω reference resistor on the module included)

< 25.2 V

> 13 V

Data for sensor selection

Input ranges (rated values / input resistance)

● Current 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

/50 Ω

Permissible input current for current input (destruction limit) 40 mA

Connection of signal transducers

● for current measurement

as 2-wire transducer

as 4-wire transducer

possible

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.12 Analog input module SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 153

Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR)

...can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN

by means of CiR on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

14044916).

See also

Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders (Page 90)

The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14)

Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17)

Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20)

Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 120)

3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

(6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

Order Number

6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0

Features

The analog output module SM 332, AO 4 x 0/4 ... 20 mA is characterized by the following

features:

● 4 current outputs in 4 groups

● Resolution 15 bit

● Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

● configurable diagnostics

● Channels electrically isolated

● Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+

Note

When switching the load voltage (L+) on and off, incorrect intermediate values can occur

at the output for approx. 10 ms.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

154 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Block diagram of SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA

6)&+4,04,&+00&+4,&+;5'$%6)60))))[)/0/0വ'$/00//4,0$2[P$0വ&+വ&+വ&+വ&+'$'$/0/0'$2XWSXW(OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ(OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ6)JURXSIDXOWGLVSOD\>UHG@)FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@'LJLWDOWRDQDORJFRQYHUWHU2XWSXW/RJLFDQGEDFNSODQHEXVLQWHUIDFH2XWSXW2XWSXW

Image 3-19 Module view and block diagram of SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation

You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the CPU or IM 153 (in a distributed

configuration) and the Ex I/O modules whose signal cables lead into the hazardous location.

In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should use the ex dividing

panel/ex barrier instead of the dummy module.

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure

In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line

chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location.

Parameterization

You set up the functionality designed for analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

● in STEP 7 or

● in the user program with SFCs.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 155

Default settings

The analog output module features default settings for output type, interrupts, default settings

etc..

These defaults apply to modules which were not reprogrammed with STEP 7.

Channel groups

Table 3-35 Allocation of 4 channels to 4 channel groups of the SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Channel Allocated channel group

Channel 0 Channel group 0

Channel 1 Channel group 1

Channel 2 Channel group 2

Channel 3 Channel group 3

Unswitched output channels

To ensure that the unswitched output channels of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x

0/4...20 mA are without voltage, you must deactivate them. You deactivate an output channel

using STEP 7 by means of the "Output" parameter block.

Analog outputs

You can connect the outputs as:

● Current outputs

The outputs can be set channel by channel. You program the output type in STEP 7.

Output ranges

Configure the various current output ranges in STEP 7.

Table 3-36 Output ranges of the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

selected output

mode

Explanation Output range

Current The digitized analog values are listed in the chapter Analog

value representation of the output range of the analog out‐

puts (Page 102).

from 0 to 20 mA

from 4 to 20 mA

Wire-break monitoring

The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA carries out a wire break check.

Conditions:

A wire break can only be signaled if the minimum output current > 100 µA and the voltage

generated at the load > 12 V.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

156 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Influence of load voltage dips on diagnostics messages

If the 24 V load voltage falls below the permitted rated range (< 20.4 V), there may be a

reduction in the output current at connected loads > 400 Ω and output currents > 18 mA before

a diagnostic message is transmitted.

Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA

Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120

Weight approx. 280 g

Module-specific data

Configuration in Run (CiR) supported yes

● Behavior of non-configured outputs during CiR They specify the output value that ap‐

plied before the parameters were set.

Number of outputs 4

Line length, shielded max. 200 m

ATEX approvals

II 3 G (2) GD

Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc

Test number KEMA 01ATEX1062 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2,

Group A, B, C, D T4

Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials

Bus power supply

Rated load voltage L+

5 V DC

24 V DC

● Reverse voltage protection yes

Electrical isolation

● between channels and backplane bus yes

● between channels and load voltage L+ yes

● between the channels yes

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

● between channels and backplane bus DC 60 V

AC 30 V

● between channels and load voltage L+ DC 60 V

AC 30 V

● between the channels DC 60 V

AC 30 V

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ DC 60 V

AC 30 V

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

● between channels and backplane bus 300 VDC

250 VAC

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 157

● between channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC

250 VAC

● between the channels 300 VDC

250 VAC

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+ DC 75 V

AC 60 V

Insulation tested

● between the backplane bus and load voltage L+with 2500 V DC

● Channels to each other with 2500 V DC

● Backplane bus with respect to load voltage L+ with 500 V DC

Current input

● from backplane bus

● from load voltage L+ (at rated data)

max. 80 mA

max. 200 mA

Module power loss typical 4 W

Analog value formation

Resolution (incl. overrange) 15 Bit

Cycle time (all channels) 9.5 ms

Transient recovery time

● for resistive load 0.2 ms

● for capacitive load 0.5 ms

● for inductive load 0.2 ms

Switch substitute values yes, configurable

Interference suppression, error limits

Crosstalk attenuation between outputs > 130 dB

Operational limit (in total temperature range, referred to out‐

put range)

± 0.55%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C, referred to output

range)

± 0.2%

Temperature error (referred to output range) ± 0.01 %/K

Linearity error (referred to output range) ± 0.02%

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25 °C, referred to

output range)

± 0.005%

Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz (referred to output range) ± 0.02%

Interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions Configurable

● Group fault indication red LED (SF)

● Channel fault indication red LED (F) per channel

● Diagnostic information readout possible

monitoring for

● Wire break yes

as of output value

and

> 0.1 mA

Output voltage > 12 V

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

158 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Safety specifications

(see EU special test certificate KEMA 01ATEX1062 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))

Maximum values of the output circuits (per channel)

● U0 (no-load output voltage) max. 14 V

● I0 (short-circuit current) max. 70 mA

● P0 (load power) max. 440 mW

● L0 (permissible external inductance) max. 6.6 mH

● C0 (permissible external capacity) max. 730 nF

● Um (fault voltage) max. 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Ta (permissible ambient temperature) max. 60°C

Data for sensor selection

Output ranges (rated values)

● Current

from 0 to 20 mA

from 4 to 20 mA

Load impedance (in rated range of output)

● for current outputs

– resistive load

– inductive load

– capacitive load

max. 500 Ω

max. 6.6 mH1

max. 730 nF1

Current output

● No-load voltage

max. 14 V

Destruction limit for externally applied voltages / currents

● Voltages

● Current

max. + 12 V / - 0.5V

max. + 60 mA / - 1A

Wiring of actuators

● for current output

2-wire connection

yes

1 KEMA approval limitations

When used in a non-Ex areas, the following

● resistive load max. 500 Ω

● inductive load max. 15 mH

● capacitive load max. 3 µF

can be set as the load impedance.

Configuration in RUN (CiR)

If you use the Configuration in RUN function, the following special feature occurs.

SF LED is lit:

If a diagnostic event was pending before you started to reassign parameters, the SF LEDs (on

the CPU, IM or module) may be lit even though the diagnostic event has been cleared and the

module is operating properly.

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 159

Remedy:

● Only make new parameter settings when there is no diagnostic event pending on the

module, or

● Inserting and removing modules

Additional information on Configuration in RUN (CiR)

...can be found in the online help for STEP7 and in the manual System modification in RUN

by means of CiR on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

14044916).

See also

The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14)

Configuration of an S7-300 with Ex I/O Modules (Page 17)

Configuration of an ET 200M with Ex I/O modules (Page 20)

Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 120)

Analog value notation of the current measurement ranges (Page 89)

SIMATIC S7 Ex Analog Modules

3.13 Analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA (6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0)

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

160 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules 4

Most of the examples listed in this manual refer to the use of HART analog modules with

PROFIBUS DP interface modules.

Overview

There are two analog input modules and two analog output modules each with HART functions

in the product range of the SIMATIC S7 Ex-HART analog modules.

● SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog input module),

Order number: 6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0 (Revision 5)

Order number: 6ES7 331-7TB10-0AB0 (Revision 7)

● SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog output module),

Order number: 6ES7 332-5TB00-0AB0 (Revision 5)

Order number: 6ES7 332-5TB10-0AB0 (Revision 7)

The electrical properties of Revision 5 and Revision 7 modules are identical. The modules

differ only in the interfaces (parameters, diagnostics, user data and HART request interface)

and in the HART functionality and the supported HART version.

4.1 Using HART analog modules

Basic characteristics

The SIMATIC S7 HART analog modules belong to the category of SIMATIC S7-Ex analog

modules. Their basic properties were described in section "Simatic S7 Ex analog modules"

and also apply here.

You can operate the HART analog modules as part of the distributed I/O ET 200M with the

interface modules:

● As of IM153-2BA00 or as of IM153-2BB00 as coupling to PROFIBUS DP.

● As of IM153-2BA20 as coupling to PROFIBUS DP for the modules 6ES7 331-7TB10-0AB0

and 6ES7 332-5TB10-0AB0.

● As of IM153-4BA00 as coupling to PROFINET IO.

In this application, the ET 200M is the HART master for HART devices (intelligent field devices).

The IM153 directs the commands (for example, parameter assignment) that come from the

HART client

(for example, SIMATIC PDM or programmed via the data record interface of the HART analog

modules) through the HART analog module to the intelligent field devices. The reply comes

back the same way. In the figure below, the gray line represents the communication path in

an application with PROFIBUS DP.

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 161

Image 4-1 Location of the HART analog modules in the distributed system

Application in the system

The HART analog modules are used in the distributed I/O connected to the PROFIBUS DP or

PROFINET IO.

You can connect one field device to each of the two channels on a HART analog module: the

module acts as a HART master, the field devices as HART slaves.

Various software applications, such as SIMATIC PDM, can send or receive data to or from a

transducer via a HART analog module. They can be compared to clients for which the HART

analog module is the server.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.1 Using HART analog modules

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

162 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

4.2 Introduction to HART

4.2.1 Definition of HART

Introduction

This section provides you with an introduction to HART from a user's perspective:

● Definition of HART

● Advantages of HART analog modules

● Typical applications of HART

Definition

"HART" stands for "Highway Addressable Remote Transducer"

The HART functions enable you to operate the analog modules in conjunction with digital

communication. The HART protocol is generally accepted as a standard protocol for

communication with smart field devices: Hart is a registered trademark of the "HART

Communication Foundation" (HCF), which retains all rights for the HART protocol. You can

find detailed information about HART in the HART specification.

Advantages of HART

The use of HART analog modules has the following advantages:

● Compatible connection to analog modules: current loop 4 - 20 mA

● additional digital communication with the HART protocol

● low power requirements with HART, important for use in hazardous areas

● a wide range of field devices with HART functions are now available

● integration of the HART functionality in the S7 system when using HART analog modules

Typical applications

The following are typical applications of HART:

● Installation of field devices (central assignment of parameters)

● Modification of field device parameters online

● Display of information, maintenance data and diagnostic data for field devices

● Integration of configuration tools for field devices via the HART interface

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.2 Introduction to HART

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 163

4.2.2 HART functions

Introduction

The HART protocol describes the physical characteristics of transmission: Data transfer

procedures, message structure, data formats, and commands.

HART signal

The following diagram shows the analog signal with the modulating HART signal (FSK

procedure). The HART signal is composed of sine waves at 1200 Hz and 2200 Hz and has a

mean value of zero. It can be filtered out with an input filter, leaving the original analog signal

unaffected.

+]+]P$P$$.$.$.$.P$P$

①Analog signal

②Time (seconds)

(A) Response

(K) Command

Image 4-2 The HART signal

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.2 Introduction to HART

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

164 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

HART commands and parameters

The adjustable properties of the HART field devices (HART parameters) can be set with HART

commands and read using HART responses. The HART commands and their parameters are

defined in three groups with the following properties:

● universal

● common-practice

● device-specific

Universal commands and their parameters must be supported by all manufacturers of HART

field devices; common-practice commands should also be supported. There are also device-

specific commands that apply to a particular field device.

Examples of HART parameters

The following table shows the HART parameters of the different groups:

Table 4-1 Examples of HART parameters

Parameter group HART field device parameters

universal Measured or manipulated value (primary variable), manufacturer name, proc‐

ess tags or final control element ID, additional measured values or manipu‐

lated values

common-practice Measuring range, filter time, interrupt parameters (message, alarm and warn‐

ing limits), output range

device-specific special diagnostic information

Examples of HART commands

The following two tables provide examples of commands:

Table 4-2 Examples of universal commands

Command Function

0 Read manufacturer and device type - only with this command 0 can field devices

be addressed by means of a short frame address

11 Read manufacturer and device type

1 Read primary variable and unit

2 Read current and percentage of the range, digitally as floating-point number

(IEEE 754)

3 Read up to four pre-defined dynamic variables (primary variables, secondary

variables, etc.)

13, 18 Read or write measuring point tag, description and date (data included in trans‐

mission)

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.2 Introduction to HART

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 165

Table 4-3 Examples of common-practice commands

Command Function

36 Sets the upper limit of the range

37 Sets the lower limit of the range

41 Carries out the device self-test

43 Sets the primary variable to zero

109 Switch burst mode on or off

Burst mode

Burst mode means that a command initiates cyclic response of the slave. This response is

sent repeatedly until the mode is deactivated by the master device.

Data and status

HART commands are often transmitted without data, because they are used to start a

processing function. HART responses always contain data. The HART response frame always

includes status data which you should evaluate in order to validate the response.

4.2.3 Application of HART

System environment for HART use

To use a smart field device with HART functionality, you require the following system

environment (see diagram below):

●current loop 4 - 20 mA

●HART configuration tool:

You can assign the HART parameters either with an external HART handheld device or

with the configuration tool, SIMATIC PDM. The configuration tool accesses the HART

analog module directly, whereas the HART hand-held device is connected parallel to the

field device. SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is available as autonomous (stand-

alone) tool or embedded in STEP 7 HW Config or PCS 7.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.2 Introduction to HART

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

166 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

●HART system connection:

The HART analog module assumes the function of a "master," in that it receives the

commands from the HART configuration tool, forwards them to the field device, and then

sends back the responses. The interface of the HART analog module comprises data

records which are transmitted via the I/O bus. The data records must be created and

interpreted by the HART configuration tool.

●Interface IM153-2 (PROFIBUS DP) and IM153-4 (PROFINET IO) for HART configuration

tool:

DP Connection which is capable of master class 1 as well as master class 2 functionality.

P$/9$'86,0$7,&3'0+$57KDQGKHOG+$57UHVLVWDQFH0*URXQG)LOWHULQJRXWRIWKH+$57VLJQDO$QDORJGLJLWDOFRQYHUVLRQRIWKHF\FOLFPHDVXUHGYDOXH&RQQHFWLRQWR352),%860RGHP+$57DQDORJPRGXOH)LHOGGHYLFHZLWK+$57IXQFWLRQDOLW\+$57SDUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQWWRRO

Image 4-3 System environment required for HART

Error handling

The two HART status bytes transmitted with each response of the field device contain error

information relating to HART communication, HART commands and device status, (see "HART

communication data records").

These are evaluated by the HART analog module, among other devices, and made available

in the system via the S7 diagnostic mechanisms.

See also

HART Communication Data Records (Page 194)

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.2 Introduction to HART

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 167

4.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation

4.3.1 Example configuration

Application in the system

A sample configuration is used to show you how to start up a HART analog module with the

field devices connected, and the points you should take into consideration during operation.

You can find more information on the operation of the field devices in the

integrated help for

SIMATIC PDM

03,6,0$7,&3&6RUWKLUGSDUW\V\VWHP$XWRPDWLRQV\VWHPZLWK6RU6ZLWK'3&38RU'3&3+$57DQDORJRXWSXWPRGXOH+$57DQDORJLQSXWPRGXOH'LVWULEXWHG,2(70RU31,2ZLWK+$57DQDORJPRGXOHV:LULQJ+$57ILHOGGHYLFHVWR+$57DQDORJLQSXWFKDQQHOVRU+$57DQDORJRXWSXWFKDQQHOV3URJUDPPLQJILHOGGHYLFHV3*3&ZLWK6,0$7,&3'0VWDQGDORQH,QWHOOLJHQWILHOGGHYLFHV+$57WUDQVGXFHUIRUH[DPSOH6,75$163+$57ILQDOFRQWUROHOHPHQWVIRUH[DPSOH6,3$57362SHUDWRUFRQWURODQGPRQLWRULQJ6,0$7,&3&63URJUDPPLQJ+$57DQDORJPRGXOHV&RQILJXUH3*3&ZLWK67(3RUILHOGGHYLFHV3*3&ZLWK6,0$7,&3'0

$UHD+D]DUGRXV5DQJHZKLFKLVQRWSRWHQWLDOO\H[SORVLYHDUHD

352),%86'3VODYH,031,2GHYLFH,0

Image 4-4 Use of a HART analog module in a sample configuration

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

168 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Note

Notes on intrinsically-safe installation

You must connect the DM 370 dummy module between the IM 153 interface module and

explosion-proof I/O modules, which include HART I/O modules, whose signal cables lead into

the hazardous area. In a distributed configuration with an active backplane bus, you should

use the explosion-proof partition (6ES7 195-1KA00-0XA0) instead of the dummy module.

4.3.2 Setting Up the HART Analog Module and Field Devices

Installation

Commission the HART analog modules using STEP 7, and the intelligent field devices

connected using the SIMATIC PDM programming tool:

Configuring and assigning parameters

1. Plug the HART analog module into the ET200M distributed I/O system. "Configuring and

assigning parameters" to the associated station in the SIMATIC Manager with STEP 7:

Start by double-clicking on the "Hardware" icon.

2. Select the ET 200M distributed I/O with a High Feature IM153 from the module catalog and

attach this to the PROFIBUS (note the DP slave address) or PROFINET IO network.

3. Insert the HART analog module in the desired slot and assign the module parameters:

You start the parameter assignment dialog by double-clicking the HART analog module in

the selected slot.

With HART Revision 7 analog modules, you can also configure up to 8 additional HART

variables in the user data area of the module using the parameter assignment dialog in HW

Config. See 4.5.1 for more on this.

4. Insert the HART field devices in the corresponding channels.

When you insert a HART field device, the field device already connected in the "Device

Selection (Reassign)" configuration dialog is identified via the "Device identification".

5. Download the configuration for the station which also contains the parameters for the HART

analog module, to the programmable logic controller.

6. The field devices are configured with SIMATIC PDM via the channel to which the field device

is connected:

You start by double-clicking the HART field device configured on the channel.

7. Now you can configure the field devices using the SIMATIC PDM configuration tool:

Within SIMATIC PDM, you see a device-specific configuration interface based on the type

of the connected field device. You must have installed the EDD of the field device, the IM

153, and the HART analog module beforehand.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 169

Modifying the parameters of the field devices

Note that the field devices report a configuration change to the HART module whenever you

edit their parameters. This leads to a diagnostic interrupt on the programmable logic controller,

provided this option is enabled. During commissioning it can be advantageous to disable the

diagnostic interrupt when you assign parameters to the HART analog module.

A diagnostic interrupt can also be triggered, if enabled, during parameter modification with the

handheld.

See also

Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 171)

4.3.3 Operating Phase of the HART Analog Module and Field Devices

Operating phase

In the operating phase you must distinguish between the cyclic return of user data, the acyclic

HART operation and the cyclic HART communication.

● Cyclic process data such as the measured values can be requested from the automation

system PROFIBUS DP master class 1) The user data area with input and output data is

available for this.

● the acyclic operation for diagnostics and modifying the parameters of the field devices is

carried out with the SIMATIC PDM parameter assignment tool or with a HART hand-held

device using HART commands and HART responses.

● You can establish HART communication via read/write data record.

The operating phase

1. Switch the programmable logic controller to "RUN": User data are transmitted cyclically via

PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO.

2. You can evaluate the user data cyclically in your user program. With HART Revision 7

analog modules, up to four HART variables of the connected transducer are provided for

evaluation in the user data.

3. You can perform diagnostics and re-configuration of field devices with the configuration

tool, SIMATIC PDM:

You start by double-clicking the HART field device configured on the channel.

4. You can send HART commands to the connected transducers at any time via the data

record interface of the HART analog modules. For example, you can re-configure the

transducers or read data from the transducers.

See 4.4.6.3 for Revision 5 modules or 4.5.7.3 for Revision 7 modules.

Access to the field devices

The HART analog module generally accepts the modification of parameters for the field

devices. Access rights can only be allocated using the configuration tool.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.3 Guidelines for Installation and Operation

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

170 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Modifying the parameters of the field devices

To modify the parameters of the field devices connected to the HART analog modules, proceed

as follows:

1. To modify the parameters of a field device, enter a HART command using the SIMATIC

PDM configuration tool.

2. The HART analog module triggers a diagnostics interrupt when it detects new field device

parameters, provided diagnostics interrupts are enabled.

Information on status

After you have modified the parameters of a HART field device, the corresponding bit is set in

the device status of the connected field device (= HART status byte). This should be regarded

as an indicator and not as an error and is reset by the module. For more information, see the

"HART status bytes" section.

See also

Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules (Page 174)

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

Overview

The following SIMATIC S7 HART analog modules are described in this section:

● SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog input module),

Order number: 6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0

● SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog output module),

Order number: 6ES7 332-5TB00-0AB0

This section provides the information you need to use the modules as a HART interface.

4.4.1 Parameters of HART Analog Modules

Overview of the parameters

The following table lists the parameters for the HART analog input module, the next table lists

the parameters for the HART analog output module. The tables show which parameters can

be set for the module as a whole and which parameters can be set separately for each channel.

General information on assigning parameters can be found in the description of the SIMATIC-

Ex analog modules.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 171

Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Table 4-4 Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Parameter Value range Default setting Type of parame‐

ter

Effective range

Basic settings enables

● Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No

Dynamic

Module

● Hardware interrupt

triggered by limit

violation

Yes/no No

● End-of-cycle

hardware interrupt

Yes/no No

Limit for hardware interrupt

● High limit 20 ...0/4 mA (from

32511 to - 32512)

Overflow

(32767)

Dynamic Channel

● Low limit 0/4 ...20 mA (from

- 32512 to 32511)

Underflow

(-32767)

Diagnostics

● Group diagnostics Yes/no No Static Channel

● with wire break

monitoring

Yes/no No

Measurement

● Measurement type Deactivated

4DMU Current (4-

wire transducer)

2DMU Current (2-

wire transducer)

HART (connected

to 2DMU or 4DMU)

HART Dynamic Channel

● Measuring range 0 to 20 mA (can on‐

ly be set with

4DMU),

4 to 20 mA

● Integration time /

interference

frequency

suppression

2.5 ms; 16.6 ms; 20

ms; 100 ms

corresponds to in‐

terference frequen‐

cy suppression

From 400 Hz; 60

Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz

20 ms

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

172 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

HART measurement

The green HART status display indicates that HART measurement is enabled at a channel

and that HART communication is active. When HART starts up, the HART analog module

transmits the HART command 0 to the field device, followed by HART command 13. The

resulting HART response data (for example "long frame" address and "tag"), are entered in

the diagnostic data record 131 or 151. When it is operating, the HART analog module

continually sends the HART command 1 to update the value of the primary variable. This value

is entered in the user data area.

Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Table 4-5 Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Parameter Value range Default setting Type of parame‐

ter

Effective range

Basic settings enable

● Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module

Diagnostics

● Group diagnostics Yes/no No Static Channel

Output

Output mode Deactivated

Current

HART

HART Dynamic Channel

Output range 4 to 20 mA

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Reaction to CPU STOP Output with zero

current and voltage

(OCV)

Keep last value

(KLV)

Set substitution val‐

ue (SSV)

Set substitution

value (SSV)

Substitute value 0 to 20mA 0 mA

HART output mode

If you have activated the HART output mode for a channel and HART communication is

running, the green HART status display lights up. When HART starts up, the HART analog

module transmits the HART command 0 to the field device, followed by HART command 13.

The resulting HART response data (for example "long frame" address and "tag"), is entered

in the diagnostic data record 131 or 151. When it is operating, the HART analog module

continually sends the HART command 1 to update the value of the primary variable. This value

is entered in the user data area.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 173

See also

Additional diagnostic data records (Page 198)

Input area (read) (Page 202)

Parameters of Analog Modules (Page 120)

4.4.2 Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules

Overview of diagnostic functions

If errors occur during configuration or parameter assignment, or during the operating phase,

you can use diagnostics to determine the cause of the error. The general diagnostic behavior

of the HART analog module corresponds to that of the other SIMATIC S7-Ex analog modules.

Diagnostic messages

The diagnostic messages for the analog input modules are shown in the table "Diagnostic

messages of the analog input module SM 331"; the diagnostic messages for the analog output

modules are shown in the table "Diagnostic messages of the analog output module SM 332".

The additional diagnostic messages are listed in the following table:

Table 4-6 Additional diagnostic messages for the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA

HART and the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Diagnostic message Effective range of diag‐

nostics

configurable with group diag‐

nostics

Modification of HART parameters reported

by the connected field device

Channel Yes

HART group error Yes

Causes of error

The following table provides a list of possible causes and corresponding corrective measures

for the individual diagnostic messages.

Table 4-7 Additional diagnostic messages, possible causes of the errors, and remedies

Diagnostic message Possible cause of error / diagnostics Corrective measures

Modification of HART pa‐

rameters reported by the

connected field device

The identifier for the modification of

parameters to the HART field device

was set in the HART device status.

If you do not want diagnostic inter‐

rupts to be triggered when parame‐

ters are modified, you should disa‐

ble the diagnostic interrupt.

HART group error Communication and command error

during HART operation affecting the

connected HART field devices.

For detailed information, evaluate

the response data record of the rel‐

evant client or the additional diag‐

nostic data record.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

174 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

HART status bytes

Each HART command is followed by a HART response containing data and status bytes. The

status bytes provide information regarding

● Device status of the connected field device (e.g. modification of parameters)

● Communication error during transmission between HART analog module and the

connected field device

● Command error during interpretation of the HART command by the connected field device

(warning, rather than error)

The HART status bytes are entered in the response data record unchanged. Their significance

is described in the technical specifications for HART. You can read the device status in your

user program by using SFC59 or SFB 53 to read the corresponding data records.

See also

Diagnostics of the Analog Modules (Page 124)

HART Communication Data Records (Page 194)

Additional diagnostic data records (Page 198)

4.4.3 Interrupts of the HART Analog Modules

Overview of the interrupts

The interrupt response of the HART analog module is similar to that of SIMATIC S7 Ex analog

modules. You can set parameters to enable or disable any interrupt.

Hardware interrupts with AI-HART

In this context we distinguish between the "out-of-limits hardware interrupt" and the "end-of-

cycle hardware interrupt". You can evaluate the local data in OB40 when a hardware interrupt

is active.

Table 4-8 Local data in OB40

Local data OB40 Bit 7 ...2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Limit

Byte 0 '0' Channel 1 Channel 0 High limit exceeded

Byte 1 '0' Channel 1 Channel 0 Low limit exceeded

Byte 2 '0' '0' '0' Not relevant

Byte 3 '0' '0' '0' Not relevant

At the end of the cycle all the bits in bytes 0-3 of the additional information for OB 40 which

are not reserved for channels 0 and 1 are set to "1". You can use the reserved bits to evaluate

whether the upper or lower limit set has been exceeded for a particular channel: if a limit has

been exceeded, a "1" is displayed instead of a "0".

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 175

See also

Interrupts of analog modules (Page 128)

Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 171)

4.4.4 HART analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

(6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0)

Order number

6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0

Features

The analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART is characterized by the following

features:

● 2 inputs in 2 channel groups

● 2 encoder supply outputs for 2-wire transducers

● The resolution of the measured value can be set separately at each channel (see "Analog

values and resolution")

● Mode of measurement, selectable for each channel group:

– 2-wire or 4-wire current transducers (with HART function)

– 2-wire or 4-wire current transducers (no HART function)

– Channel deactivated

● User-specific measuring range per channel

– 0 ... 20 mA (no HART function)

– 4 ... 20 mA

● Settings for diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt

– Group diagnostics

– Additional wire break monitoring

– Diagnostic interrupt

● Programmable hardware interrupt

– Channels 0 and 1 with limit monitoring: Programmable generation of out-of-limits

hardware interrupts

– Programmable end-of-cycle hardware interrupt

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

176 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● Electrical isolation

– Channels electrically isolated

– Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+

● Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Analog values and resolution

The representation of the analog values is the same as for the analog input module SM 331;

AI 4 x 0/4...20mA. The resolution of the input value for the HART analog input module is 15

bits + sign.

Table 4-9 Measuring types of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Selected measuring type Measuring range

2-wire transducer 4 to 20 mA

4-wire transducer 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Integration times when HART is used

When implementing transducers with HART protocol, you should preferably program

integration times of 100 ms to keep the influence of AC modulation on the measuring signal

to a minimum.

Default settings

HART measurement is set by default. There are other default settings for integration time,

diagnostics, interrupts. The HART analog module uses these settings when no parameter

modification is carried out in STEP 7.

Wire break check

Wire break recognition is not possible for the current range 0 to 20 mA.

For the current range from 4 to 20 mA, undershooting the input current of I ≤ 3.6 mA is

interpreted as a wire break. When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, the module also triggers

a diagnostic interrupt.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 177

Wiring diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA

$'86)ZLUH&+/00000;7%$%6)60+)[

ZLUH



ZLUHZLUH

0/0വ



/00////$,[P$+$570)+

ZLUH

വവവZLUHZLUHZLUHZLUH&+ZLUHZLUH0ZLUH02'(002'(0വവ+,QSXWb6)JURXSIDXOWGLVSOD\>UHG@(OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ(OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ++$57VWDWXVLQGLFDWLRQ>JUHHQ@)FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@,QSXWb/RJLFDQGEDFNSODQHEXVLQWHUIDFH)ZLUHWUDQVPLWWHUZLUHWUDQVPLWWHU9LQWHUQDO0LQWHUQDO

Image 4-5 Module view and block diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Note

The 200 ohm resistor must be in the measuring circuit when using HART transducers. This

means that a 2-wire HART transducer must be connected to terminals 3 and 5 (12 and 14)

and a 4-wire HART transducer to terminals 5 and 6 (14 and 15).

The 200 ohm resistor is optional in the measuring circuit for standard transducers without

HART.

Note

Observe the prerequisites for an intrinsically safe installation.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

178 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Special feature for the connection of active encoders

Lock the unused transducer outputs at terminals 3 and 12 with plastic bolts if you connect

active encoders to the SM 331-7TB00 module (6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0). You can use M3 x 8

plastic screws, for example (see the diagram below).

Note that these measures reduce safety-relevant data of the module. For information on safety

data, refer to the first amendment of the certificate.

➀ Load voltage supply

➁ Process connector with screw-type connection

➂ Ex (i) process cable

➃ Intrinsically safe area

➄ Line chamber

➅ Plastic screw M 3 x 8

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure

In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line

chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location.

Technical specifications of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0)

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120

Weight approx. 260 g

Module-specific data

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 179

Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Yes

● Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR They return the process value that applied before

the parameters were set.

Number of inputs

Number of power outputs

Line length, shielded Max. 400 m

ATEX approvals

II 3 G (2) GD

Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc

Test number KEMA 97ATEX3039 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4

Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials

Bus power supply

Rated load voltage L+

● Reverse voltage protection

5 VDC

24 VDC

Yes

2-wire transducer power supply

● short circuit-proof

Yes (approx. 30 mA)

Electrical isolation

● Between the channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between the channels Yes

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage L

Yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

● Between the channels and backplane bus 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Between the channels 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage L

60 VDC

30 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

● Between the channels and backplane bus 300 VDC

250 VAC

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC

250 VAC

● Between channels 300 VDC

250 VAC

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage L

75 VDC

60 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area for shared operation with F-modules

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

180 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● Between the channels and backplane bus 150 VDC

150 VAC

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ 150 VDC

150 VAC

● Between the channels 150 VDC

150 VAC

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage L

75 VDC

60 VAC

Insulation tested

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L

With 2500 VDC

● Channels to each other With 2500 VDC

● Backplane bus to load voltage L+ With 500 VDC

Current input

● From backplane bus Max. 100 mA

● From load voltage L + max. 180 mA

Module power loss typical 4.5 W

Safety specifications

(see EU special test certificate 97ATEX3039 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet (http://

support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))

Maximum values per channel

● U0 (no-load output voltage) Max. 26 V

● I0 (short-circuit current) Max. 96.1 mA

● P0 (power under load) Max. 511 mW

● L0 (permissible external inductance) Max. 3 mH

● C0 (permissible external capacity) Max. 62 nF

● Um (fault voltage) Max. DC 250V

● Ta (permissible ambient temperature) 0 to 60°C

Analog value formation

Principle of measurement SIGMA-DELTA

Integration time/conversion time/

resolution (per channel)

● Configurable Yes Yes Yes Yes

● Integration time in ms 2.5 16 2/3 20 100

● Basic conversion time plus

integration time in ms (one

channel enabled)

2.5 16 2/3 20 100

● Basic conversion time including

integration time in ms (2

channels enabled)

7.5 50 60 300

● Resolution in bits +sign

(including the overshoot range)

10 +sign 13+ sign 13+ sign 15+sign

● Interference voltage

suppression for interference

frequency f1 in Hz

400 60 50 10

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 181

Interference suppression, error limits

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 ± 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency)

● Common mode interference

between channels and reference ground M of

the CPU (VISO < 60 V)

> 130 dB

● Series mode interference (measured value +

interference signal must lie within the 0 mA to

22 mA input range)

> 60 dB

Crosstalk attenuation between inputs (VISO < 60 V) > 130 dB

Operational limit (in total temperature range, based on input range)

● from 0/4...20mA ± 0.45%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C, based on input range)

● from 0/4...20mA ± 0.1%

Temperature error (based on input range) ± 0.01%/K

Linearity error (based on input range) ± 0.01%

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25°C,

based on input range)

± 0.05%

Influence of a HART signal modulated on an input signal relative to the input range

Error at integration time

● 2.5 ms ± 0.25%

● 16 2/3 ms ± 0.05%

● 20 ms ± 0.04%

● 100 ms ± 0.02%

Interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

● Limit interrupt configurable channels 0 and 1

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions Configurable

● Group error display Red LED (SF)

● Channel error display Red LED (F) per channel

● Diagnostic information readable Possible

● HART communication active and OK Green LED (H)

Technical date of the transducer power supply

● No-load voltage < 29.6 V

● Output voltage for transducers and cables at

22 mA transducer current

(50 W measurement resistance on module

included)

> 15 V

Data for sensor selection

Input ranges (rated values / input resistance)

● Current 0 to 20 mA;

4 to 20 mA:

/50 Ω

Permissible input current for current input (destruc‐

tion limit)

40 mA

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

182 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Connection of signal transducers

● for current measurement

as 2-wire transducer

as 4-wire transducer

Possible

See also

Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders (Page 90)

The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14)

HB_Umparametrieren im RUN (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

14044916)

4.4.5 HART analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

(6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0)

Order number

6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0

Features

The HART analog output module has the following features:

● 2 current outputs in 2 channel groups

● Resolution 12 bit (+ sign)

● Output type selectable per channel:

– Current output with HART

– Current without HART

– Channel deactivated

● Selection of any output range per channel

– 0 to 20 mA (no HART function)

– 4 to 20 mA

● Settings for diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt

– Group diagnostics

– Diagnostic interrupt

● Electrical isolation

– Channels electrically isolated

– Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 183

● Read-back capability of the analog outputs

● Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Analog values and resolution

The representation of the analog values is the same as for the analog output module SM 332;

AO 4 x 0/4...20mA. The resolution of the output value for the HART analog output module is,

however, 12 bit.

Table 4-10 Output ranges of analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA

Selected output mode Output range

Current 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Default settings

The output type HART is the default setting. There are also default settings for substitute value,

diagnostics, interrupts. The HART analog output module uses these settings when no

parameters have been changed in STEP 7.

Wire break check

Wire break monitoring is possible for the current range 0/4 to 20mA.

Condition: Minimum output current > 500 µA

Effect of a falling load voltage on the diagnostic message

When the 24 V load voltage falls under the permissible rated range (< 20.4 V), if loads > 650

Ω are connected and there are output currents > 20 mA, the output current may be reduced

before a diagnostic message is issued.

Readback capability

The analog outputs can be read back in the user data range (+ sign) with a resolution of 8 bit.

Note that the value read back from the analog output is only available at the corresponding

accuracy when the conversion cycle is completed.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

184 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Wiring diagram of SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

//വ/0'$;7%$%6)60+)[00/$2[P$+$570)+&+വ&+വ&+4,04,&+06)വവ/0'$+$57+$57വ)+2XWSXWPRGHPPRGHP2XWSXW6)JURXSIDXOWGLVSOD\>UHG@(OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ,VRODWLQJDPSOLILHU'LJLWDOWRDQDORJFRQYHUWHU/RJLFDQGEDFNSODQHEXVLQWHUIDFH++$57VWDWXVLQGLFDWLRQ>JUHHQ@)FKDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWGLVSOD\V>UHG@

Image 4-6 Module view and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Note

Observe the prerequisites for an intrinsically safe installation.

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure

In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line

chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 185

Non-wired output channels

To ensure that non-wired output channels of the analog output module SM 332; AO

2 x 0/4...20mA HART are deenergized, you have to deactivate them. You deactivate an output

channel using STEP 7 by means of the "Output" parameter block.

Technical specifications of SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0)

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120

Weight Approx. 280 g

Module-specific data

Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Yes

Behavior of non-configured outputs during CiR They output the output value that applied before

the parameters were set.

Number of outputs 2

Line length, shielded Max. 400 m

ATEX approvals

II 3 G (2) GD

Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc

Test number KEMA 97ATEX2359 X

FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4

Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials

Bus power supply

Rated load voltage

● Reverse voltage protection

5 VDC

24 VDC

Yes

Electrical isolation

● Between the channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between the channels Yes

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage

L+

Yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

● Between the channels and backplane bus 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Between the channels 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage

L+

60 VDC

30 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

186 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● Between channels and backplane bus 300 VDC

250 VAC

● Between channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC

250 VAC

● Between channels 300 VDC

250 VAC

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage

L+

75 VDC

60 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area for shared operation with F-modules

● Between the channels and backplane bus 150 VDC

150 VAC

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ 150 VDC

150 VAC

● Between the channels 150 VDC

150 VAC

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage

L+

75 VDC

60 VAC

Insulation tested

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L

With 2500 VDC

● Channels to each other With 2500 VDC

● Backplane bus to load voltage L+ With 500 VDC

● Channels with respect to shield With 500 VDC

Current input

From backplane bus Max. 100 mA

From load voltage L+ (at rated data) Max. 150 mA

Module power loss Typical 3.5 W

Analog value formation

Output value

Resolution (including overrange) 12 bit (+ sign)

Cycle time (all channels) 5 ms

Transient recovery time

● for resistive load 2.5 ms

● For inductive load 2.5 ms

● For capacitive load 4 ms

Set substitute values Yes, configurable

Readback value

Resolution 8 bit (+ sign)

Conversion time (per channel) 40 ms

Interference suppression, error limits

Crosstalk attenuation between the outputs >130 dB

Operational limit (across temperature range, rela‐

tive to output range)

± 0.55%

Intrinsic error limit (operating error limit at 25°C

relative to the output range)

± 0.15%

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 187

Temperature error (relative to the output range) ± 0.01%/K

Linearity error (based on output range) ± 0.03%

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25°C,

based on output range)

± 0.005%

Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz (based on output

range)

± 0.02%

Interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions Configurable

● Group error display Red LED (SF)

● Channel error display Red LED (F) per channel

● Diagnostic information readable Possible

Monitoring for

● Wire break

From output value

Yes

> 0.5 mA

HART communication active and OK Green LED (H)

Safety specifications

(see EU special test certificate KEMA 97ATEX2359 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))

Maximum values of the output circuits (per chan‐

nel)

● U0 (no-load output voltage) Max. 19 V

● I0 (short-circuit current) Max. 66 mA

● P0 (power under load) Max. 506 mW

● L0 (permissible external inductance) Max. 7.5 mH

● C0 (permissible external capacity) Max. 230 nF

● Um (fault voltage) Max. 60 VDC

● Ta (permissible ambient temperature) Max. 60°C

Data for actuator selection

Output ranges (rated values)

● Current 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Load impedance (in rated range of output)

● for current outputs

– Resistive load

– Inductive load

Max. 650 Ω

Max. 7.5 mH1

● Capacitive load Max. 230 nF1

Current output

● No-load voltage Max. 19 V

Destruction limit for externally applied voltages /

currents

Voltages Max. + 17 V / - 0.5 V

Current Max. + 60 mA / - 1A

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

188 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Wiring of actuators

● For current output

2-wire connection

Yes

1 KEMA approval limitations can be set

as the load when used in non-ex areas

● Inductive load max. 15 mH

● Capacitive load max. 3 µF *)

*) HART communication no longer possible, however

See also

The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14)

Analog Value Representation for the Output Ranges of Analog Outputs (Page 102)

Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 171)

HB_Umparametrieren im RUN (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

14044916)

4.4.6 Data record interface

Introduction

This section contains specific data you need for programming, diagnostics and HART

communication if you want to extend the functionality of STEP7 standard applications or deploy

your own software tool for HART communication.

Configuration and parameter assignment with STEP 7

You can configure and assign parameters of the HART analog modules with STEP 7. The

integrated help system supports you in this.

You can integrate certain additional functions for writing parameters and reading diagnostic

data in your user program by means of SFCs.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 189

4.4.6.1 Parameter Data Records

Structure of the parameter data records for the HART analog input

The figures below show data record 0 for the static parameters and data record 1 for the

dynamic parameters for AI-HART and AO-HART.



 PV PV

 PV PV0XVWEH0XVWEH3DUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG3DUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG*URXSGLDJQRVWLFV:LUHEUHDNPRQLWRULQJ(QDEOH,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH(QGRIF\FOHSURFHVVLQWHUUXSW(QDEOHGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW+DUGZDUHLQWHUUXSWZKHQOLPLWH[FHHGHG&KDQQHO&KDQQHO&KDQQHO&KDQQHO+LJKOLPLWFKDQQHO/RZOLPLWFKDQQHO+LJKOLPLWFKDQQHO/RZOLPLWFKDQQHOVHHWKHIROORZLQJ7DEOHILUVWWKHKLJKE\WHWKHQWKHORZE\WH0HDVXUHPHQWPRGHUDQJHIRUFKDQQHO0HDVXUHPHQWPRGHUDQJHIRUFKDQQHO%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WHWRWR

Image 4-7 Parameters of the HART analog input module

Table 4-11 Codes for the measuring type and measuring range of the HART analog input module

Measurement type Code Measuring range Code

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000

4-wire transducer 2#0010 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

2#0010

2#0011

2-wire transducer 2#0011 4 to 20 mA 2#0011

HART (2-wire or 4-wire transduc‐

ers can be connected)

2#0111 4 to 20 mA HART 2#1100

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

190 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Structure of the parameter data records for the HART analog output

The figure below shows data record 0 for the static parameters and data record 1 for the

dynamic parameters.

3DUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG3DUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG*URXSGLDJQRVWLFV(QDEOH0XVWEH0XVWEH5HDFWLRQWR&3867232'DFWLYH(QDEOHGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW&KDQQHO&KDQQHO&KDQQHO&KDQQHO6XEVWLWXWHYDOXHFKDQQHO5HVHUYHG5HVHUYHG5HVHUYHGVHHWKHIROORZLQJ7DEOH VXEVWLWXWHYDOXH ODVWYDOXHILUVWWKHKLJKE\WHWKHQWKHORZE\WH0HDVXUHPHQWPRGHUDQJHIRUFKDQQHO0HDVXUHPHQWPRGHUDQJHIRUFKDQQHO%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WHWRWR6XEVWLWXWHYDOXHFKDQQHO0XVWEH0XVWEH0XVWEH0XVWEH5HVHUYHG)RUWKHVXEVWLWXWHYDOXH(+H[WKHRXWSXWVZLOOEHGLVDEOHG

Image 4-8 Parameters of the HART analog output module

Table 4-12 Code for the measurement type / range of the HART analog output module

Output mode Code Output range Code

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000

Current output without HART 2#0010 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

2#0010

2#0011

Current output with HART 2#0111 4 to 20 mA HART 2#1100

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 191

4.4.6.2 Diagnostic data records

Structure and contents of the diagnostic data

The diagnostic data for a module can be up to 16 bytes long and consist of data records 0 and

● Data record 0 contains system-specific diagnostic data: 4 bytes that are set on a system-

wide basis and apply to both HART analog inputs and outputs.

● Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data of an S7-300 that are also in data

record 0 and 6 bytes of module class-specific diagnostic data.

Diagnostic data record DS0 / DS1

%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH0RGXOHHUURU0RGXOHFODVV&3&KDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH,QWHUQDOHUURU3URFHVVRUIDLOXUH(3520HUURU5$0HUURU$'&'$&IDXOW)XVHEORZQ+DUGZDUHLQWHUUXSWORVWRQO\LQWKHFDVHRI$,+$57([WHUQDOHUURU&KDQQHOHUURU([WHUQDODX[LOLDU\YROWDJHPLVVLQJ,QFRUUHFWSDUDPHWHUVLQWKHPRGXOH0RGXOHKDVQRLQWHUQDOVXSSO\YROWDJH1RSDUDPHWHUVVHWLPPHGLDWHO\DIWHUUHWXUQRIYROWDJH&\FOHWLPHPRQLWRULQJIRUWKHPRGXOHUHVSRQGHGZDWFKGRJ

Image 4-9 Diagnostic data: data record 0/1

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

192 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Diagnostic data: data record DS1

The following diagram shows the contents of bytes 4 to 9 of the diagnostic data.

%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH&KDQQHOW\SH%+$57DQDORJLQSXWPRGXOH,GHQWLILHUIRUFKDQQHORUFKDQQHOJURXS&RQILJXULQJSDUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQWHUURU9LRODWLRQRIPHDVXUHPHQWUDQJHORZHUOLPLWRQO\LQWKHFDVHRIDQDORJLQSXW9LRODWLRQRIPHDVXUHPHQWUDQJHXSSHUOLPLWRQO\LQWKHFDVHRIDQDORJLQSXW,GHQWLILHUIRUFKDQQHORUFKDQQHOJURXS&KDQQHOW\SH%+$57DQDORJRXWSXWPRGXOH1XPEHURIGLDJQRVWLFELWVRXWSXWE\WKHPRGXOHSHUFKDQQHO%1XPEHURILGHQWLFDOFKDQQHOVSHUPRGXOH%&KDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWVH[LVWZKHQWKHIROORZLQJ,' &KDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWVIRUFKDQQHO$VVLJQPHQWFRUUHVSRQGVWRFKDQQHO6HH%\WH+$57SDUDPHWHUUHDVVLJQPHQWUHSRUWHGE\FRQQHFWHGILHOGGHYLFH+$57FKDQQHOHUURUIXUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQDERXW+$57UHVSRQVHGDWDUHFRUGRUDGGLWLRQDOGLDJQRVWLFV&KDQQHOVSHFLILFIDXOWVIRUFKDQQHO:LUHEUHDN

Image 4-10 Diagnostic data: data record 1

Note

Please note the following points regarding diagnostic data:

If a HART channel error occurs, you can obtain further information by using SFC59 or SFB 53

to read the status in the HART response data record for the relevant client or the additional

diagnostic data record for the relevant channel.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 193

See also

HART Communication Data Records (Page 194)

Additional diagnostic data records (Page 198)

4.4.6.3 HART Communication Data Records

Transfer data records

HART communication can be operated by up to 7 clients each using two separate channels.

There are 14 separate data transfer areas for this purpose, 7 for channel 0 and 7 for channel

1. Each transfer area consists of a command data record and a response data record.

Coordination rules for HART communication

● Each client / channel is allocated fixed data record numbers:

Chan‐

nel

Client / data

record

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 Command 10 14 18 22 26 30 34

0 Response 12 16 20 24 28 32 36

1 Command 50 54 58 62 66 70 74

1 Response 52 56 60 64 68 72 76

● Each client may only use the data record numbers allocated to its transfer area.

● For example, for client 6, channel 0: the command is data record 30 and the response is

data record 32.

● After having written a command data record, the client must read the response data record

before it writes the next command data record.

● The transfer area of each client is allocated a data ready bit in the user data area, which is

set when new data can be collected.

● In Master Class 2 the client can evaluate the "processing state" in the response data record:

if the "processing state" indicates "successful" or "error," the data record contains current

response data or error bits respectively.

● All data must be read, because the module can modify the data record if the initial read

operation returns a successful or faulty state.

● The status section of the response data record provides information on any errors that have

occurred.

● The HART burst mode cannot be used by more than one client at any one time (that is,

only one client can set this operating mode with a command).

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

194 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Structure of the command data record

The following diagram shows the structure of the data record, which you can use to write a

command in the transfer area of a client. The HART analog module transmits the command

to the connected HART field device.

DOZD\VPRQRGURSILHOGGHYLFHSHUFKDQQHO LQGLYLVLEOHFRPPDQGVHTXHQFHWR PRGXOHFRPPDQG +$57FRPPDQG&RPPDQGQXPEHU1XPEHURIFRPPDQGE\WHVVHHWKH+$57FRPPDQGV\QWD[&RPPDQGGDWDDFFRUGLQJWRWKH+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ/HQJWK1XPEHURIE\WHVPD[E\WHV%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH

Image 4-11 Command data record of the HART analog module

Notes on the command

The same client must not send a second command until the response to any previous

command has been read. In order to prevent interim execution of the commands of other

clients, the client must set the "indivisible command sequence" bit in its command:

● The inseparable command sequence is maintained as long as the bit "inseparable

command sequence" is set.

● The inseparable command sequence is terminated if the bit "inseparable command

sequence" is not set, or automatically after 10 seconds by the module.

● While an inseparable command sequence is set for one client, one command from each

of the other clients can be stored temporarily in the buffer. The stored commands are

processed once the inseparable command sequence has been terminated.

Notes on response

Always make sure that you are reading the current response data record.

● If the processing state in the response data record indicates "successful" or "error," the

data record contains current response data or error messages respectively.

● Alternatively you can evaluate the "data ready" in the user data area: the transfer area of

each client is allocated a bit in the user data area which is set when new data arrives.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 195

Structure of the response data record

The following figure shows the structure of the response data record, which contains the

response to the HART command you sent previously and any error or status bits.

%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH LQDFWLYH ZDLWLQJ ZDLWLQJLQ%XUVWPRGH UXQQLQJ VXFFHVVIXOZLWKRXWGDWD VXFFHVVIXOZLWKGDWD VXFFHVVIXOZLWK%XUVWGDWD IDXOW\+$57JURXSHUURUGLVSOD\VDOZD\VPRQRGURSWRWR3URFHVVLQJVWDWXV PRGXOHFRPPDQG +$57FRPPDQGDOZD\VUHVHUYHGIRUWLPHVWDPS$VRIKHUH+$57UHVSRQVHZLWKVWDWXV/DVWFRPPDQG1XPEHURIE\WHVIRUUHVSRQVHVW+$57VWDWXVE\WHDQGQG+$57VWDWXVE\WHVHHWHFKQLFDOVSHFLILFDWLRQIRU+$575HVSRQVHGDWDDFFRUGLQJWR+$57/HQJWK1XPEHURIE\WHVPD[E\WHV+$57SURWRFROHUURUIRUUHVSRQVHIURPILHOGGHYLFHWRPRGXOH

Image 4-12 Response data record of the HART analog modules

Evaluating the response data

When you have an up-to-date response data record, you can check the following:

● Look for the "last command" entry to verify that the response belongs to the command sent.

● You can evaluate the "Group error bits" (see following table) to locate individual errors.

● You can obtain more information from "HART protocol errors during response" (see

following table) and both HART status bytes.

● In the group error bytes the corresponding bits will be set to "1".

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

196 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Table 4-13 HART group error displays

Bit No. HART group error display Meaning

0 always 0 not used

1 command rejected Used in the following cases:

For a module command which does not exist.

If you try to activate the burst mode when it is

already activated.

If you try to deactivate the burst mode when it was

activated by another client.

If you try to change the polling address of the

HART field device.

2 further status information available. Corresponds to bit 4 in the 2nd HART status byte.

You can obtain further status information with the

HART command 48.

3 HART device status--> "Modification

of parameters" entry in diagnostic da‐

ta, data record 1

The field device transmits its device state. This in‐

formation is found in the 2nd HART status byte

which is accepted unchanged.

4 HART command status The field device transmits displays on the receipt

of the command. Information on this can be found

in the 1st HART status byte.

5 Error during HART communication--

> "HART group error" entry in diag‐

nostic data, data record 1

The field device has detected a communication er‐

ror while receiving the command. Information on

the error can be found in the 1st HART status

byte which is accepted unchanged.

6 HART protocol error during re‐

sponse--> "HART group error" entry

in diagnostic data, data record 1

Error during HART communication between field

device and module, i.e. the response was incor‐

rectly received. Information on the cause of the er‐

ror can be found in the next byte.

See following table.

7 Wire break--> parallel entry "Wire

break" in diagnostic data, data record

The connection to the transducer or final control

element is interrupted.

Table 4-14 HART protocol error during response from field device to module

Bit No. HART protocol error in byte 2 Meaning

0 bad frame timing Waiting time elapsed without response being re‐

ceived from field device.

1 always 0 not used

2 bad character transmission timing The pause between two bytes was not observed.

3 checksum error in response The checksum calculated does not match the

checksum transmitted.

4 Response frame error Error receiving HART signal (in UART)

5 Response overrun error Error receiving HART signal (in UART)

6 Response parity error Error receiving HART signal (in UART)

7 HART access not possible The connection to the field device is permanently

used. This error is registered if the transmission

time exceeds 10 seconds.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 197

4.4.6.4 Additional diagnostic data records

Additional diagnostic data

The additional diagnostic data provide information on the state of the HART communication

following the last command.

● Additional diagnostic data record 128 for channel 0, 129 for channel 1

● Additional diagnostic data record 130 for channels 0 and 1: When the module starts up the

recognized connected HART field devices and their identifiers ("tags") are entered here.

● Additional diagnostic data records 131 for channel 0 and 151 for channel 1 with the data

for the identifiers found in the additional diagnostic data record 130.

Structure of the diagnostic data records 128 and 129

The following figure shows the structure of the diagnostic data records 128 and 129.

%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH+$57JURXSHUURUGLVSOD\VDOZD\VUHVHUYHGIRUWLPHVWDPSDOZD\VPRQRGURSILHOGGHYLFHSHUFKDQQHO PRGXOHFRPPDQG +$57FRPPDQG1XPEHURIWKHODVWFOLHQWLI+$57FRPPDQGKDVHUURUWR$VRIKHUH+$57VWDWXV/DVWFRPPDQGVW+$57VWDWXVE\WHDQGQG+$57VWDWXVE\WHVHHWHFKQLFDOVSHFLILFDWLRQIRU+$57+$57SURWRFROHUURUIRUUHVSRQVHIURPILHOGGHYLFHWRPRGXOH

Image 4-13 Diagnostic data records 128 and 129 of the HART analog modules

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

198 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Structure of the diagnostic data record 130

The diagram below shows the structure of diagnostics data record 130 from which you can

request the identification of connected HART transducers or final control elements.

%LWVWR %LW1R%LW1R +$57ILHOGGHYLFHIRXQG QR+$57ILHOGGHYLFHIRXQG +$57LGHQWLILFDWLRQIRXQG QR+$57LGHQWLILFDWLRQIRXQG%LWVWR %\WHVIRUFKDQQHODQG%\WHVIRUFKDQQHO%\WHVIRUFKDQQHODQG%\WHVIRUFKDQQHO

Image 4-14 Diagnostic data record 130 of the HART analog modules

Structure of the diagnostic data records 131 and 151

These contain the data corresponding to the identifiers marked in data record 130: The address

of the HART field device found and the HART identifier with measuring point tag or final control

element identifier. The structure is illustrated in the following diagram.

● Data record 131 for channel 0 (length: 38 bytes)

● Data record 151 for channel 1 (length: 38 bytes)

%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH0HDVXULQJSRLQW,'WDJ5HVSRQVHGDWDWR+$57FRPPDQG1RRIE\WHVIRUWKHUHVSRQVHGDWDWR+$57FRPPDQG+$57LGHQWLILFDWLRQ5HVSRQVHGDWDWR+$57FRPPDQGಯORQJIUDPHDGGUHVVE\WHVDQG

Image 4-15 Diagnostic data records 131 and 151 of the HART analog module

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 199

4.4.6.5 Additional parameter data records

Structure of the parameter data records 128 and 129

The following diagram shows the structure of the additional parameter data records 128 for

channel 0 and 129 for channel 1. The settings affect the assigned channel:

1XPEHURIUHWULHVLQ+$57FRPPXQLFDWLRQ:LUHEUHDNILOWHUWLPH8QLWVRQO\$,+$575HIUHVKWLPHRIWKH+$57YDULDEOHVLQWKHXVHUGDWDDUHDVHHGLDJUDP8QLWV%\WH%\WH%\WH

Image 4-16 Parameter data records 128 and 129 of the HART analog modules

Notes on the additional parameters

The additional parameters comprise parameters which you do not normally need to change,

as they have already been set to an optimized value: The following table provides explanations

of the parameters and the default values.

Table 4-15 Additional parameters of the HART analog modules

Parameter Explanation Value range and default setting

Repeated attempts The HART analog modules initiate the

configured retry sequence when send‐

ing a command to a field device whose

port is in use by another function.

Value range:

Default setting:

No repeat at‐

tempts:

0 to 127

Wire break filter time 1A wire break is only signaled if it occurs

for longer than the set filter time.

Value range:

Default set‐

ting:

no filter time:

0 to 20

3 ≙ 0.75 s

Update time The HART modules send the HART

command 1 automatically, to read the

present value of the primary variable.

Value range:

Default set‐

ting:

no filter time:

0 to 255, 12 ≙

3 s

1 Several diagnostics interrupts may be generated during startup due to differences in the time-related

startup characteristics of transducers. The wire break filter time was introduced to avoid this problem.

Default parameter assignment for DP master class 2

HART analog modules which are not in parameterized state, for example after power failure,

can receive default parameters from PROFIBUS DP master class 2 when the PLC is in OFF

state. This is carried out with the aid of parameter data record No. 250 which consists of one

byte with the value unequal 0. However, the assignment of default parameters can only be

initiated when the module is in an unparameterized state. You can determine the state of the

module by reading the diagnostic data record.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

200 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

4.4.6.6 User data interface

Overview of the user data

The user data range of the HART analog modules includes the following for both channel 0

and channel 1:

● Current as analog input value or analog output value

● Primary variable in HART format (measured value or manipulated variable)

● Identifiers for clients to indicate that new data can be collected.

Relative addresses are specified in the description of the user data. Determine the module

address offset using the "Configuring and programming" application in STEP7.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 201

Input area (read)

Structure of the user data

The following figure shows the structure of the user data area for the HART analog input

module. The data for the user data area can be read in the desired format using "Read

peripheral data" (for example, L PIW 256) and evaluated in your user program.

&KDQQHO$QDORJLQSXWYDOXHZLWK$,+$575HDGEDFNYDOXHZLWK$2+$57&KDQQHO$QDORJLQSXWYDOXHZLWK$,+$575HDGEDFNYDOXHZLWK$2+$570DLQSURFHVVTXDQWLW\SULPDU\YDULDEOH3URFHVVYDOXHDVIORDWLQJSRLQWDVVSHFLILHGLQ+$57IRUFKDQQHO'DWDUHDG\ELW LQGLFDWHVWKDWWKHUHDUHQHZXQUHDGUHVSRQVHGDWDLQWKHWUDQVIHUDUHDRIWKHFOLHQW+$57FRGHIRUWKHSK\VLFDOVL]HRIWKH+$57YDULDEOHVIRUFKDQQHO'DWDIRUFKDQQHOVWUXFWXUHDQDORJRXVWRFKDQQHOE\WHV%LWQR&OLHQWQR9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW9DOXHLQ,(((IORDWLQJSRLQWIRUPDW%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH

Image 4-17 Input user data area of the HART analog modules

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.4 HART Analog Modules - Revision 5

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

202 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Output Area (write)

Structure of the user data

The following diagram shows the structure of the user data area for the HART analog output

modules. The data for the user data area can be read in the desired format using "Write

peripheral data" (for example, L POW 256) and evaluated in your user program.

%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH&KDQQHO$QDORJRXWSXWYDOXHRQO\LQWKHFDVHRI$2+$57&KDQQHO$QDORJRXWSXWYDOXHRQO\LQWKHFDVHRI$2+$575HVHUYHG9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW

Image 4-18 User data area of the HART analog output module

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

Overview

The following SIMATIC S7 HART analog modules are described in this section:

● SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog input module),

Order number: 6ES7 331-7TB10-0AB0

● SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (HART analog output module),

Order number: 6ES7 332-5TB10-0AB0

This section provides the information you need to use the modules as a HART interface.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 203

The HART Analog Modules – Revision 7 offer the following in comparison to Revision 5

modules:

● You can use HART 5, HART 6 and HART 7 transducers.

● You can also configure up to 8 additional HART variables in the user data area of the module

using the parameter assignment dialog in HW Config.

● The mapping of HART commands and HART responses to S7 data records is based on

the

PROFIBUS Profile HART Version 1.0

. See 4.5.7.3.

Requirement

The HART Analog Modules – Revision 7 can be used as of STEP7 V5.5 + SP4 and SIMATIC

PCS 7 V8.1.

The modules can be used on PROIFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO in connection with the

respective High Feature interface modules

IM 153-2, 6ES7153-2BA02-0XB0 or

IM 153-4, 6ES7153-4BA00-0XB0.

Integration of the HART analog modules based on the PROFINET IO standard is possible with

the current GSDML file (as of GSDML V2.3 Siemens ET200M 20140124.xml) for IM153-4.

Field devices can be configured with SIMATIC PDM V6.1 and higher or SIMATIC PDM V 8.1

SP 1.

You need the EDD for the ET 200M for this. For PROFIBUS DP as of EDD V1.1.17 and

PROFINET IO as of EDD V770.1.2.

4.5.1 Configuring HART variables

Introduction

Numerous HART field devices make available additional measurement variables (e.g. sensor

temperature). These can be read if they are set accordingly in the field device configuration in

SIMATIC PDM.

Using the HART variables it is possible to adopt the set measured values directly from the field

device into the I/O area of your automation system.

A maximum of 8 HART variables can be configured for HART modules. You assign the HART

variables to a channel in the properties dialog for the module.

Address assignment

The HART modules use 16 input/output bytes (user data). If you configure HART variables,

the modules use an additional 5 bytes of input data for each HART variable.

If you use all 8 HART variables, the HART modules use a total of 56 input bytes (16 bytes +

8 x 5 bytes = 56 bytes).

The "None" configuration occupies no additional input bytes.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

204 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

No HART variables are placed in the user data area for configuration in run (CIR). However,

an additional 5 bytes of address space are reserved for a subsequent re-configuration.

Configuration of HART variables

You assign the HART variables in STEP 7 HW Config.

You can configure up to 4 HART variables for each channel

● PV (Primary Variable)

● SV (Secondary Variable)

● TV (Tertiary Variable)

● QV (Quaternary Variable)

If you want to assign the HART variable later in the user program, use the CiR parameter. CiR

is a placeholder that reserves the address space for a HART variable. You must configure the

HART variables you are not using with the "None" parameter.

Example of a configuration of HART variables

The figure below shows an example for the configuration of HART variables.

Image 4-19 Example of a configuration of HART variables

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 205

Structure of HART variables

Each HART variable uses 5 bytes of input data and is structured as follows:

9DOXHLQ+(;IRUPDW+$57YDULDEOH4XDOLW\FRGH%\WHQ%\WHQ%\WHQ%\WHQ%\WHQ

Structure of the "Quality Code" byte

The Quality Code (QC) can assume the following values:

Quality Code (QC) Meaning

0x4C or 0 Initialization: 0 value of IM and 4C of module

0x18 Communication cancelled / no communication

0x0C Fault in HART device

0x47 HART device is busy

0x84 OK "Configuration changed"

0x80 OK

Reassign HART variables in RUN mode

You can reassign HART variables in RUN mode in S7-400 automation systems with CiR

capability and also in S7-400H systems.

Requirement: HART variable must already be configured in HW Config as PV, SV, TV, QV, or

CiR.

4.5.2 Parameters of HART Analog Modules

Overview

The following tables contain the parameters of the HART analog input module and the

parameters of the HART analog output module. The tables show which parameters can be

set for the module as a whole and which parameters can be set separately for each channel.

You can find general information on parameter assignment in the description of the SIMATIC

analog modules in the Manual

Automation System SIMATIC S7-300 Module Data

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

206 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Table 4-16 Parameters of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Parameter Value range Default setting Type of pa‐

rameter

Effective range

Basic settings enables

● Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module

● Hardware interrupt

triggered by limit violation

Yes/no No

● End-of-cycle hardware

interrupt

Yes/no No

Limit for hardware interrupt

● High limit At 0 to 20mA:

23.52 to -3.52mA

At 4 to 20mA:

22.81 to 1.185mA

Overflow

(32767)

Dynamic Channel

● Low limit At 0 to 20mA:

-3.52 to 23.52mA

At 4 to 20mA:

1.185 to

22.81mA

Underflow

(-32768)

Diagnostics

● Group diagnostics Yes/no No Static Channel

● with wire break monitoring Yes/no No

● HART group diagnostics Yes/no No

Measurement

● Measurement type Deactivated

4DMU (4-wire

transducer)

2DMU (2-wire

transducer)

4DMU

(4-wire trans‐

ducer)

Dynamic Channel

● Measuring range Deactivated

0...20 mA

(can only be set

with 4DMU)

4 to 20mA

4 to 20 mA

● Integration time /

Interference frequency

suppression

2.5 ms; 16.6 ms;

20 ms; 100 ms

Corresponds to

Interference fre‐

quency suppres‐

sion

From 400 Hz; 60

Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz

20 ms

HART

● HART function Yes/no Yes Dynamic Channel

● Retries 0-255 10

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 207

Wire break check

The wire break check is only possible if group diagnostics is enabled and the measuring range

is 4 to 20mA.

HART function

The HART functionality is only possible in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA. When the HART

function is activated, the HART analog module transmits the HART command 0 to the field

device, cyclically followed by HART command 3. Once a correct communication with the HART

field device is established, the green HART status display lights up.

HART group diagnostics

HART group diagnostics refers to the HART communication and is possible for a selected

HART function even when group diagnostics are not activated. If the HART function is not

selected, no HART group diagnostics are possible.

Parameters of the SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Table 4-17 Parameters of the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Parameter Value range Default set‐

ting

Type of parameter Effective

range

Basic settings enable

● Diagnostic interrupt Yes/no No Dynamic Module

Diagnostics

Group diagnostics Yes/no No Static Channel

HART group diagnostics Yes/no No

Output

Output mode Deactivated

Current

Current Dynamic Channel

Output range 4 to 20 mA

0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Reaction to CPU STOP Output with zero

current and volt‐

age (OCV)

Keep last value

(KLV)

Set substitution

value (SSV)

Set substitu‐

tion value

(SSV)

Substitute value 0 to 20mA 0mA

HART

● HART function Yes/no Yes Dynamic Channel

● Retries 0-255 10

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

208 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

HART function

HART is only possible in the output range 4 to 20mA. When the HART function is activated,

the HART analog module transmits the HART command 0 to the field device, cyclically followed

by HART command 3. Once a correct communication with the HART field device is established,

the green HART status display lights up.

HART group diagnostics

HART group diagnostics refers to the HART communication and is possible for a selected

HART function even when group diagnostics are not activated. If the HART function is not

selected, no HART group diagnostics are possible.

4.5.3 Diagnostic Functions of HART Analog Modules

Overview of diagnostic functions

If errors occur during configuration or parameter assignment, or during the operating phase,

you can use diagnostics to determine the cause of the error. The general diagnostic behavior

of the HART analog module corresponds to that of the other SIMATIC S7-Ex analog modules.

Diagnostic messages to which parameters can and cannot be assigned

We distinguish between diagnostic messages to which parameters can be assigned and those

to which they cannot be assigned.

You only obtain configurable diagnostic messages if you have enabled diagnostics at the

relevant parameters. Assign the parameters in the "Diagnostics" configuration dialog in

STEP 7

The analog module always provides non-configurable diagnostic messages, regardless of the

enable state of diagnostic functions.

Actions after a diagnostic message in STEP 7

Every diagnostic message initiates the following actions:

● The diagnostic message is entered into the diagnostics of the analog module.

● The group error LED (SF LED) on the analog module is lit.

● The channel error LED also lights for channel-specific errors.

● When "Enable Diagnostic Interrupt" is set in STEP 7, the system triggers a diagnostic

interrupt and calls the OB 82 in the CPU.

Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules

All analog input modules return the measured value 7FFFH as a reaction to errors, regardless

of parameter settings. This measured value indicates either overflow, error, or a disabled

channel.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 209

Diagnostic message via LED

The analog modules indicate module-specific as well as channel-specific errors with their SF

LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights up as soon as the analog module detects an error.

It goes out once all errors are resolved.

In addition, channel-specific errors are displayed via the corresponding channel error LED.

"Analog" diagnostic messages

Table 4-18 "Analog" diagnostic messages

Diagnostic message Effective range of diag‐

nostics

Configurable

External auxiliary voltage missing Module No

Module not configured

Incorrect parameters

Time watchdog tripped

EPROM error

RAM error

ADC/DAC error

Hardware interrupt lost

Parameter assignment error Channel No

Wire break Channel Yes

Underflow

(only with analog input and if no wire

break check is enabled)

Channel Yes

Overflow

(only with analog input)

Channel Yes

Overflow

Acquired analog values above 23.52 mA (for measuring range 0 to 20 mA) or 22.81 mA (for

the measuring range 4 to 20mA) are reported as "overflow" if group diagnostics are enabled.

The analog value is set to 0x7FFF. It has no effect on the HART communication.

Underflow

A current less than 1.1845 mA is reported as "underflow" if group diagnostics are enabled and

wire break diagnostics are disabled. The analog value is set to 0x8000. No HART

communication is possible below 1.1845 mA.

Wire break

A current less than 3.6 mA is reported as "wire break" with analog input if group diagnostics

and wire break diagnostics are enabled. Wire break is reported as cleared for a current higher

than 3.8 mA. The analog value is set to 0x7FFF for "wire break". HART communication is

active up to 1.1845 mA.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

210 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

A wire break check is performed for analog output in the measuring range 4 to 20mA if group

diagnostics are enabled . A wire break is reported for a current lower than approximately 500

µA. No HART communication is possible with "wire break".

Causes of error and remedies for "analog" diagnostic messages

Table 4-19 Diagnostic messages of analog input module, causes of error and remedies

Diagnostic message Possible cause of error Remedy

external auxiliary volt‐

age missing

No load voltage L+ in the module Provide L+ supply

Module not configured Startup error Program the module

Incorrect parameters Implausible parameter or combi‐

nation thereof

Program the module

Time watchdog tripped partially high electromagnetic in‐

terference

Module defective

Eliminate interference sources

Replace the module

EPROM error

RAM error

ADC/DAC error Module defective Replace the module

Hardware interrupt lost Hardware interrupts are trig‐

gered faster than the CPU can

process them

Check the system, if necessary, use a

more powerful CPU

Parameter assignment

error

A parameter or combination of

parameters of parameter data re‐

cord 1 is implausible

A parameter of the HART param‐

eter data records (131/132) is in‐

correct

Check parameters and transfer them to

the module again

Wire break Resistance of transducer circuit

too high

Use a different type of sensor or modify

the wiring, for example, using a larger

conductor cross-section

Break in the line between the

module and sensor

Connect line

Channel not connected (open) Disable channel ("Measuring type" pa‐

rameter)

Wire the channel

Underflow Input value below underflow

range, error possibly caused by:

Wrong measuring range setting

Configure a different measuring range

The sensor could be connected

the wrong way in the measuring

range 4 to 20 mA

Check connection terminals

Overflow Input value exceeds overflow

range

Configure a different measuring range

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 211

"HART" diagnostic messages

Table 4-20 Additional HART diagnostic messages of the analog input module

Diagnostic message Effective range of diagnos‐

tics

Configurable

HART communication error Channel Yes

Main variable outside limits

Secondary value outside of limits

Analog output saturated

Analog output fixed current intensity

Further status information available

Configuration changed

Field device malfunction

HART communication error

Communication error with HART field device of HART group diagnostics are enabled.

All remaining HART diagnostic messages are reported by the connected field device in the

HART status bytes and displayed by the analog module as a diagnostic result.

HART status bytes

Each HART command is followed by a HART reply that contains data and two status bytes.

The status bytes provide information regarding

● Device status of the connected field device (e.g. parameter modification)

● Communication error during transmission between the HART analog module and the

connected field device

● Command error in the interpretation of the HART command through the connected field

device (warning rather than error message).

The HART status bytes are accepted unchanged in the HART reply record. Their significance

is described in the technical specifications for HART.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

212 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Causes of error and remedies with "HART" diagnostic messages

The following table contains the possible causes of the errors described in the additional

diagnostic messages and the remedies.

Table 4-21 Additional HART diagnostic messages, possible causes of errors and remedies

Diagnostic message Possible cause of error / diagnostics Corrective measures

HART communication er‐

ror

● HART field device not

responding

● Timing error

● Check the process wiring

● Correct the parameter

assignment.

● Current less than 1.1845 mA

● Increase number of assigned

retries

● Analog input: Connect a

capacitor of approximately 150

nF in parallel to the transducer

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 213

Main variable outside lim‐

its

● Incorrect parameters in the

HART device

● HART device has simulation,

and simulation is set to "Primary

variable outside the limits"

● Incorrect measuring point

● Primary variable parameterized

outside the limits

● Check the parameter

assignment of the HART device

● Correct simulation

● Check whether the correct

sensor is connected

Secondary value outside

of limits

● Incorrect parameters in the

HART device

● HART device has simulation,

and simulation is set to "Non-

primary variable outside the

limits"

● Incorrect measuring point

● Primary variable parameterized

outside the limits

Analog output saturated ● Incorrect parameters in the

HART device

● HART device has simulation,

and the measured value set for

the simulation is too high

● Incorrect measuring point

● Primary variable parameterized

outside the limits

Analog output fixed cur‐

rent intensity

● Incorrect parameters in the

HART device

● HART device has simulation,

and the measured value set for

the simulation is too high

● Incorrect measuring point

● Primary variable parameterized

outside the limits

Further status informa‐

tion available

(deleted after 3 s)

● HART device supplies further

status.

● Read out status and correct, if

necessary

Configuration changed The identifier for the parameter mod‐

ification of the HART field device

was set in the HART device status

(= HART status bytes).

If you do not want diagnostic inter‐

rupts to be triggered when parame‐

ters are modified, you should disa‐

ble the diagnostic interrupt.

Field device malfunction Communication and command error

during HART operation affecting the

connected HART field devices.

For detailed information analyze the

reply record of the corresponding cli‐

ent or the diagnostic data record.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

214 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

See also

Diagnostics of the Analog Modules (Page 124)

HART Communication Data Records (Page 194)

Additional diagnostic data records (Page 198)

Diagnostic data records (Page 192)

4.5.4 Interrupts of the HART Analog Modules

Overview of the interrupts

The interrupt response of the HART analog module is similar to that of SIMATIC S7 Ex analog

modules. You can set parameters to enable or disable any interrupt.

Hardware interrupts with AI-HART

In this context we distinguish between the "out-of-limits hardware interrupt" and the "end-of-

cycle hardware interrupt". You can evaluate the local data in OB40 when a hardware interrupt

is active.

Table 4-22 Local data in OB40

Local data OB40 Bit 7 ...2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Limit

Byte 0 '0' Channel 1 Channel 0 High limit exceeded

Byte 1 '0' Channel 1 Channel 0 Low limit exceeded

Byte 2 '0' '0' '0' Not relevant

Byte 3 '0' '0' '0' Not relevant

At the end of the cycle all the bits in bytes 0-3 of the additional information for OB 40 which

are not reserved for channels 0 and 1 are set to "1". You can use the reserved bits to evaluate

whether the upper or lower limit set has been exceeded for a particular channel: if a limit has

been exceeded, a "1" is displayed instead of a "0".

See also

Interrupts of analog modules (Page 128)

Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 171)

4.5.5 HART Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

(6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0)

Order number

6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 215

Features

The analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART is characterized by the following

features:

● 2 inputs in 2 channel groups

● 2 encoder supply outputs for 2-wire transducers

● The resolution of the measured value can be set separately at each channel (see "Analog

values and resolution")

● Mode of measurement, selectable for each channel group:

– 2-wire transducer current

– 4-wire transducer current

– Channel deactivated

● User-specific measuring range per channel

– 0 ... 20 mA (only for 4-wire transducer)

– 4 ... 20 mA

● HART functionality (only for 4 to 20 mA)

– Support for HART 5 to HART 7

– Configuring HART variables

● Settings for diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt

– Group diagnostics

– Additional wire break monitoring

– Diagnostic interrupt

● Programmable hardware interrupt

– Channels 0 and 1 with limit monitoring: Programmable generation of out-of-limits

hardware interrupts

– Programmable end-of-cycle hardware interrupt

● Electrical isolation

– Channels electrically isolated

– Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+

● Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

216 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Analog values and resolution

The representation of the analog values is the same as for the analog input module SM 331;

AI 4 x 0/4...20mA. The resolution of the input value for the HART analog input module is 15

bits + sign.

Table 4-23 Measuring types of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Selected measuring type Measuring range

2-wire transducer 4 to 20 mA

4-wire transducer 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Integration times when HART is used

When implementing transducers with HART protocol, you should preferably program

integration times of 100 ms to keep the influence of AC modulation on the measuring signal

to a minimum.

Default settings

HART measurement is set by default. There are other default settings for integration time,

diagnostics, interrupts. The HART analog module uses these settings when no parameter

modification is carried out in STEP 7.

Wire break check

Wire break recognition is not possible for the current range 0 to 20 mA.

For the current range from 4 to 20 mA, undershooting the input current of I ≤ 3.6 mA is

interpreted as a wire break. When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, the module also triggers

a diagnostic interrupt.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 217

Wiring diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA

$'86)ZLUH&+/00000;7%$%6)60+)[

ZLUH



ZLUHZLUH

0/0വ



/00////$,[P$+$570)+

ZLUH

വവവZLUHZLUHZLUHZLUH&+ZLUHZLUH0ZLUH02'(002'(0വവ+,QSXWb6)JURXSHUURUGLVSOD\>UHG@(OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ(OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ++$57VWDWXVGLVSOD\>JUHHQ@)FKDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURUGLVSOD\V>UHG@,QSXWb/RJLFDQGEDFNSODQHEXVLQWHUIDFH)ZLUHWUDQVPLWWHUZLUHWUDQVPLWWHU9LQWHUQDO0LQWHUQDO

Image 4-20 Module view and block diagram of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Note

The 200 ohm resistor must be in the measuring circuit when using HART transducers. This

means that a 2-wire HART transducer must be connected to terminals 3 and 5 (12 and 14)

and a 4-wire HART transducer to terminals 5 and 6 (14 and 15).

The 200 ohm resistor is optional in the measuring circuit for standard transducers without

HART.

Note

Observe the prerequisites for an intrinsically safe installation.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

218 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Special feature for the connection of active encoders

Lock the unused transducer outputs at terminals 3 and 12 with plastic bolts if you connect

active encoders to the SM 331-7TB00 module (6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0). You can use M3 x 8

plastic screws, for example (see the diagram below).

Note that these measures reduce safety-relevant data of the module. For information on safety

data, refer to the first amendment of the certificate.

➀ Load voltage supply

➁ Process connector with screw-type connection

➂ Ex (i) process cable

➃ Intrinsically safe area

➄ Line chamber

➅ Plastic screw M 3 x 8

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure

In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line

chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location.

Technical specifications of SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0)

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120

Weight approx. 260 g

Module-specific data

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 219

Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Yes

● Behavior of non-configured inputs during CiR They return the process value that applied before

the parameters were set.

Number of inputs

Number of power outputs

Line length, shielded Max. 400 m

ATEX approvals

II 3 G (2) GD

Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc

Test number KEMA 97ATEX3039 X

FM/UL approvals

Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4

Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials

Bus power supply

Rated load voltage L+

● Reverse voltage protection

5 VDC

24 VDC

Yes

2-wire transducer power supply

● short circuit-proof

Yes (approx. 30 mA)

Electrical isolation

● Between the channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between the channels Yes

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage L

Yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

● Between the channels and backplane bus 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Between the channels 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage L

60 VDC

30 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

● Between the channels and backplane bus 300 VDC

250 VAC

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC

250 VAC

● Between channels 300 VDC

250 VAC

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage L

75 VDC

60 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area for shared operation with F-modules

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

220 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● Between the channels and backplane bus 150 VDC

150 VAC

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ 150 VDC

150 VAC

● Between the channels 150 VDC

150 VAC

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage L

75 VDC

60 VAC

Insulation tested

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L

With 2500 VDC

● Channels to each other With 2500 VDC

● Backplane bus to load voltage L+ With 500 VDC

Current input

● From backplane bus Max. 100 mA

● From load voltage L + Max. 180 mA

Module power loss typical 4.5 W

Safety specifications

(see EU special test certificate 97ATEX3039 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet (http://

support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))

Maximum values per channel

● U0 (no-load output voltage) Max. 26 V

● I0 (short-circuit current) Max. 96.1 mA

● P0 (power under load) Max. 511 mW

● L0 (permissible external inductance) Max. 3 mH

● C0 (permissible external capacity) Max. 62 nF

● Um (fault voltage) Max. DC 250V

● Ta (permissible ambient temperature) 0 to 60°C

Analog value formation

Principle of measurement SIGMA-DELTA

Integration time/conversion time/

resolution (per channel)

● Configurable Yes Yes Yes Yes

● Integration time in ms 2.5 16 2/3 20 100

● Basic conversion time plus

integration time in ms (one

channel enabled)

2.5 16 2/3 20 100

● Basic conversion time including

integration time in ms (2

channels enabled)

7.5 50 60 300

● Resolution in bits +sign

(including the overshoot range)

10 +sign 13+ sign 13+ sign 15+sign

● Interference voltage

suppression for interference

frequency f1 in Hz

400 60 50 10

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 221

Interference suppression, error limits

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 ± 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency)

● Common mode interference

between channels and reference ground M of

the CPU (VISO < 60 V)

> 130 dB

● Series mode interference (measured value +

interference signal must lie within the 0 mA to

22 mA input range)

> 60 dB

Crosstalk attenuation between inputs (VISO < 60 V) > 130 dB

Operational limit (in total temperature range, based on input range)

● from 0/4...20mA ± 0.45%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C, based on input range)

● from 0/4...20mA ± 0.1%

Temperature error (based on input range) ± 0.01%/K

Linearity error (based on input range) ± 0.01%

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25°C,

based on input range)

± 0.05%

Influence of a HART signal modulated on an input signal relative to the input range

Error at integration time

● 2.5 ms ± 0.25%

● 16 2/3 ms ± 0.05%

● 20 ms ± 0.04%

● 100 ms ± 0.02%

Interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

● Limit interrupt configurable channels 0 and 1

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions Configurable

● Group error display Red LED (SF)

● Channel error display Red LED (F) per channel

● Diagnostic information readable Possible

● HART communication active and OK Green LED (H)

Technical date of the transducer power supply

● No-load voltage < 29.6 V

● Output voltage for transducers and cables at

22 mA transducer current

(50 W measurement resistance on module

included)

> 15 V

Data for sensor selection

Input ranges (rated values / input resistance)

● Current 0 to 20 mA;

4 to 20 mA:

/50 Ω

Permissible input current for current input (destruc‐

tion limit)

40 mA

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

222 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Connection of signal transducers

● for current measurement

as 2-wire transducer

as 4-wire transducer

Possible

See also

Analog value notation of the measurement ranges of resistive encoders (Page 90)

The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14)

HB_Umparametrieren im RUN (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

14044916)

4.5.6 HART Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

(6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0)

Order number

6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0

Features

The HART analog output module has the following features:

● 2 current outputs in 2 channel groups

● Resolution 12 bit (+ sign)

● Output type selectable per channel:

– Current output

– Channel deactivated

● Selection of any output range per channel

– 0 to 20 mA

– 4 to 20 mA

● HART functionality

– Support for HART 5 to HART 7

– Configuring HART variables

● Settings for diagnostics and diagnostic interrupt

– Group diagnostics

– Diagnostic interrupt

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 223

● Electrical isolation

– Channels electrically isolated

– Channels electrically isolated from the CPU and from load voltage L+

● Read-back capability of the analog outputs

● Configuration in Run (CiR) supported

Analog values and resolution

The representation of the analog values is the same as for the analog output module SM 332;

AO 4 x 0/4...20mA. The resolution of the output value for the HART analog output module is,

however, 12 bit.

Table 4-24 Output ranges of analog output module SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA

Selected output mode Output range

Current 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Default settings

The output type HART is the default setting. There are also default settings for substitute value,

diagnostics, interrupts. The HART analog output module uses these settings when no

parameters have been changed in STEP 7.

Wire break check

Wire break check is possible for the output range 4 to 20 mA.

Effect of a falling load voltage on the diagnostic message

When the 24 V load voltage falls under the permissible rated range (< 20.4 V), if loads > 650

Ω are connected and there are output currents > 20 mA, the output current may be reduced

before a diagnostic message is issued.

Readback capability

The analog outputs can be read back in the user data range (+ sign) with a resolution of 8 bit.

Note that the value read back from the analog output is only available at the corresponding

accuracy when the conversion cycle is completed.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

224 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Wiring diagram of SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

//വ/0'$;7%$%6)60+)[00/$2[P$+$570)+&+വ&+വ&+4,04,&+06)വവ/0'$+$57+$57വ)+2XWSXW0RGHP0RGHP2XWSXW6)JURXSHUURUGLVSOD\>UHG@(OHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQ,VRODWLQJDPSOLILHU'LJLWDOWRDQDORJFRQYHUWHU/RJLFDQGEDFNSODQHEXVLQWHUIDFH++$57VWDWXVGLVSOD\>JUHHQ@)FKDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURUGLVSOD\V>UHG@

Image 4-21 Module view and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART

Note

Observe the prerequisites for an intrinsically safe installation.

Power supply for an intrinsically-safe structure

In order to maintain the clearances and creepage distances, L+/M must be routed via the line

chamber LK393 when operating modules with signal cables that lead to the hazardous location.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 225

Non-wired output channels

To ensure that non-wired output channels of the analog output module SM 332; AO

2 x 0/4...20mA HART are deenergized, you have to deactivate them. You deactivate an output

channel using STEP 7 by means of the "Output" parameter block.

Technical specifications of SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART (6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0)

Dimensions and weight

Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 40 x 125 x 120

Weight Approx. 280 g

Module-specific data

Configuration in Run (CiR) supported Yes

Behavior of non-configured outputs during CiR They output the output value that applied before

the parameters were set.

Number of outputs 2

Line length, shielded Max. 400 m

ATEX approvals

II 3 G (2) GD

Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc

Test number KEMA 97ATEX2359 X

FM/UL approvals Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4

Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Voltages, currents, potentials

Bus power supply

Rated load voltage

● Reverse voltage protection

5 VDC

24 VDC

Yes

Electrical isolation

● Between the channels and backplane bus Yes

● Between the channels Yes

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage

L+

Yes

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the Ex area

● Between the channels and backplane bus 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Between the channels 60 VDC

30 VAC

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage

L+

60 VDC

30 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

226 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

● Between channels and backplane bus 300 VDC

250 VAC

● Between channels and load voltage L+ 300 VDC

250 VAC

● Between channels 300 VDC

250 VAC

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage

L+

75 VDC

60 VAC

Permitted potential difference (VISO) of signals of the non-Ex area for shared operation with F-modules

● Between the channels and backplane bus 150 VDC

150 VAC

● Between the channels and load voltage L+ 150 VDC

150 VAC

● Between the channels 150 VDC

150 VAC

● Between the backplane bus and load voltage

L+

75 VDC

60 VAC

Insulation tested

● Channels to backplane bus and load voltage L

With 2500 VDC

● Channels to each other With 2500 VDC

● Backplane bus to load voltage L+ With 500 VDC

● Channels with respect to shield With 500 VDC

Current input

From backplane bus Max. 100 mA

From load voltage L+ (at rated data) Max. 150 mA

Module power loss Typical 3.5 W

Analog value formation

Output value

Resolution (including overrange) 12 bit (+ sign)

Cycle time (all channels) 5 ms

Transient recovery time

● for resistive load 2.5 ms

● For inductive load 2.5 ms

● For capacitive load 4 ms

Set substitute values Yes, configurable

Readback value

Resolution 8 bit (+ sign)

Conversion time (per channel) 40 ms

Interference suppression, error limits

Crosstalk attenuation between the outputs >130 dB

Operational limit (across temperature range, rela‐

tive to output range)

± 0.55%

Intrinsic error limit (operating error limit at 25°C

relative to the output range)

± 0.15%

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 227

Temperature error (relative to the output range) ± 0.01%/K

Linearity error (based on output range) ± 0.03%

Repeatability (in steady-state condition at 25°C,

based on output range)

± 0.005%

Output ripple; range 0 to 50 kHz (based on output

range)

± 0.02%

Interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

● Diagnostic interrupt Configurable

Diagnostic functions Configurable

● Group error display Red LED (SF)

● Channel error display Red LED (F) per channel

● Diagnostic information readable Possible

Monitoring for

● Wire break

From output value

Yes

> 0.5 mA

HART communication active and OK Green LED (H)

Safety specifications

(see EU special test certificate KEMA 97ATEX2359 X under certificates of conformity on the Internet

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/134200))

Maximum values of the output circuits (per chan‐

nel)

● U0 (no-load output voltage) Max. 19 V

● I0 (short-circuit current) Max. 66 mA

● P0 (power under load) Max. 506 mW

● L0 (permissible external inductance) Max. 7.5 mH

● C0 (permissible external capacity) Max. 230 nF

● Um (fault voltage) Max. 60 VDC

● Ta (permissible ambient temperature) Max. 60°C

Data for actuator selection

Output ranges (rated values)

● Current 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Load impedance (in rated range of output)

● for current outputs

– Resistive load

– Inductive load

Max. 650 Ω

Max. 7.5 mH1

● Capacitive load Max. 230 nF1

Current output

● No-load voltage Max. 19 V

Destruction limit for externally applied voltages /

currents

Voltages Max. + 17 V / - 0.5 V

Current Max. + 60 mA / - 1A

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

228 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Wiring of actuators

● For current output

2-wire connection

Yes

1 KEMA approval limitations can be set

as the load when used in non-ex areas

● Inductive load max. 15 mH

● Capacitive load max. 3 µF *)

*) HART communication no longer possible, however

See also

The LK 393 line chamber (Page 14)

Analog Value Representation for the Output Ranges of Analog Outputs (Page 102)

Parameters of HART Analog Modules (Page 171)

HB_Umparametrieren im RUN (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

14044916)

4.5.7 Data record interface

Introduction

This section contains specific data you need for programming, diagnostics and HART

communication if you want to extend the functionality of STEP7 standard applications or deploy

your own software tool for HART communication.

Configuration and parameter assignment with STEP 7

You can configure and parameterize the HART analog modules with STEP 7. The integrated

help system supports you in this.

You can integrate certain additional functions for writing parameters and reading diagnostic

data in your user program by means of SFCs.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 229

Reading and writing records

To read and write records, use the following SFCs / SFBs:

● Read record:

– SFC 59 "RD_REC

– SFB 52 "RDREC" ( mandatory for Profinet ! )

● Write record:

– SFB 53 "WRREC" ( mandatory for Profinet ! )

– SFC 55 "WR_PARAM"

– SFC 58 "WR_REC"

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

230 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

4.5.7.1 Parameter Data Records

Structure of the parameter records 0/1 for the HART analog input

The figures below show data record 0 for the static parameters and data record 1 for the

dynamic parameters for AI-HART and AO-HART.



 PV PV

 PV PV3DUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG3DUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG*URXSGLDJQRVWLFV(QDEOH,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH(QGRIF\FOHKDUGZDUHLQWHUUXSW(QDEOHGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW+DUGZDUHLQWHUUXSWZKHQOLPLWH[FHHGHG&KDQQHO&KDQQHO&KDQQHO&KDQQHO+LJKOLPLWFKDQQHO/RZOLPLWFKDQQHO+LJKOLPLWFKDQQHO/RZOLPLWFKDQQHOVHHWKHIROORZLQJWDEOHILUVWWKHKLJKE\WHWKHQWKHORZE\WH0HDVXUHPHQWPRGHUDQJHIRUFKDQQHO0HDVXUHPHQWPRGHUDQJHIRUFKDQQHO%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WHWRWR%\WH:LUHEUHDNFKHFNFKDQQHO:LUHEUHDNFKHFNFKDQQHO+$57GLDJQRVWLFHQDEOHFKDQQHO+$57GLDJQRVWLFHQDEOHFKDQQHO

Image 4-22 Parameters of the HART analog input module

Table 4-25 Codes for the measuring type and measuring range of the HART analog input module

Measurement type Code Measuring range Code

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000

4-wire transducer 2#0010 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA with HART

2#0010

2#0011

2#0111

2-wire transducer 2#0011 4 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA with HART

2#0011

2#0111

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 231

Structure of the parameter data records for the HART analog output

The figure below shows data record 0 for the static parameters and data record 1 for the

dynamic parameters.

3DUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG3DUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG*URXSGLDJQRVWLFV(QDEOH5HDFWLRQWR&3867232'DFWLYH(QDEOHGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW&KDQQHO&KDQQHOUHVHUYHGUHVHUYHG6XEVWLWXWHYDOXHFKDQQHO6XEVWLWXWHYDOXHFKDQQHOVHHWKHIROORZLQJWDEOHILUVWKLJKE\WHWKHQORZE\WH2XWSXWPRGHUDQJHIRUFKDQQHO2XWSXWPRGHUDQJHIRUFKDQQHO%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WHWRWR%\WH+$57GLDJQRVWLFHQDEOHFKDQQHO+$57GLDJQRVWLFHQDEOHFKDQQHO&KDQQHO&KDQQHO1XPEHURI+$57UHWULHVFKDQQHO1XPEHURI+$57UHWULHVFKDQQHO0XVWEH0XVWEH0XVWEH0XVWEH7KHRXWSXWVDUHGHHQHUJL]HGZLWKDVXEVWLWXWHYDOXHRI(+H[ VXEVWLWXWHYDOXH NHHSODVWYDOXH

Image 4-23 Parameters of the HART analog output module

Table 4-26 Code for the measurement type / range of the HART analog output module

Output mode Code Output range Code

Deactivated 2#0000 Deactivated 2#0000

Current output 2#0010 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA with HART

2#0010

2#0011

2#0111

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

232 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Structure of the HART parameter data records 131/132

There is a specific HART parameter data record for each channel:

● Data record 131: HART parameter data for channel 0

● Data record 132: HART parameter data for channel 1

%\WH%\WH%LWLVUHVHWDIWHUHYDOXDWLRQRIWKHGDWDUHFRUGE\WKHPRGXOH $FWLYDWH+$57 'HDFWLYDWH+$57 3ULPDU\PDVWHU 6HFRQGDU\PDVWHU1XPEHURISUHDPEOHE\WHVWR,QLWLDOYDOXH ,QLWLDOYDOXHDFFRUGLQJWR+$57$FWLYDWLRQIURPWKHSDUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUGDOZD\VDVSULPDU\PDVWHU0XVWEH%\WH0XVWEH%\WH%\WH2IIVHWIRUPDQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFSDUDPHWHUVDFFRUGLQJWR+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ1XPEHURIUHWULHVIRU+$57FRPPXQLFDWLRQWR,QLWLDOYDOXHIURPSDUDPHWHUGDWDUHFRUG)LHOGGHYLFHPRGHLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ%\WH0XVWEH&OLHQWWLPHRXWLQVWRV,QLWLDOYDOXH V%\WH5HVHUYHG%\WH0XVWEH

Image 4-24 Data record

These records are not absolutely necessary for the HART operation.

If these records are not transferred to the module after module startup, the HART interface

works with the specified initial values. The number of HART retries and the HART enable are

used in accordance with the parameter data record 1.

However, both HART parameter data records can write to the module at any time during

operation for each data record (for example, using SFC 58 "WR_REC"). The parameters are

applied accordingly by the respective HART channel and overwrite the values currently in

effect.

This way you can also adjust the "Number of preamble bytes", the "Client timeout" as well as

the HART mode to suit your needs.

The transferred HART parameters are not used if an error occurs in DR131 / DR132. The

previous values remain in effect. The error is reported as channel-specific parameter

assignment error in diagnostic data record 1.

Each new parameter assignment with parameter data record 1 sets the HART parameters

back to the "initial values".

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 233

4.5.7.2 Diagnostic data records

Structure and contents of the diagnostic data

The diagnostic data of a module consists of the data records 0 and 1:

● Data record 0 has a length of 4 bytes and contains system-specific diagnostic data: 4 bytes

that are defined system-wide and are valid for HART analog input and output.

● Data record 1 has a length of 16 bytes and contains

– 4 bytes of diagnostic data for an S7-300, which are also in data record 0 and another

– 8 bytes of module-specific diagnostic data

Diagnostic data record DS0 / DS1

%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH0RGXOHPDOIXQFWLRQ0RGXOHFODVV&3&KDQQHOLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH,QWHUQDOHUURU3URFHVVRUIDLOXUH(3520HUURU5$0HUURU$'&'$&HUURU)XVHEORZQ+DUGZDUHLQWHUUXSWORVWRQO\ZLWKDQDORJLQSXW([WHUQDOHUURU&KDQQHOIDXOW([WHUQDODX[LOLDU\YROWDJHPLVVLQJ,QFRUUHFWSDUDPHWHULQWKHPRGXOH0RGXOHKDVQRLQWHUQDOVXSSO\YROWDJH0RGXOHQRWFRQILJXUHG0RGXOHF\FOHWLPHPRQLWRULQJZDWFKGRJDFWLYDWHG

Image 4-25 Diagnostic data: data record 0

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

234 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Diagnostic data: data record DS1

The following diagram shows the contents of bytes 4 to 11 of the diagnostic data. Bytes 12 to

15 are always zero.

%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH&KDQQHOW\SH[,'IRUFKDQQHO3DUDPHWHUDVVLJQPHQWHUURU2YHUIORZRQO\ZLWKDQDORJLQSXW8QGHUIORZRQO\ZLWKDQDORJLQSXW,'IRUFKDQQHO1XPEHURIGLDJQRVWLFELWV2XWSXWE\WKHPRGXOHSHUFKDQQHO%1XPEHURILGHQWLFDOFKDQQHOVSHUPRGXOH%&KDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURUVH[LVWZKHQWKHIROORZLQJ,' &KDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURUVIRUFKDQQHO$OORFDWLRQDFFRUGLQJWRFKDQQHOVHHE\WHVDQG+$57FRPPXQLFDWLRQHUURU&KDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURUVIRUFKDQQHO+$57PRGXOH:LUHEUHDN%\WH3ULPDU\YDULDEOHPDLQYDULDEOHRXWVLGHWKHOLPLWV&RQILJXUDWLRQFKDQJHG)LHOGGHYLFHPDOIXQFWLRQ1RQSULPDU\YDULDEOHDX[LOLDU\YDULDEOHRXWVLGHWKHOLPLWV&KDQQHOVSHFLILFHUURUVIRUFKDQQHO+$57ILHOGGHYLFH)XUWKHUVWDWXVLQIRUPDWLRQDYDLODEOH$QDORJRXWSXWIL[HGFXUUHQWLQWHQVLW\ILHOGGHYLFH$QDORJRXWSXWVDWXUDWHGILHOGGHYLFH%\WH

Image 4-26 Diagnostic data: data record 1

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 235

Note

Please note the following points regarding diagnostic data:

If a HART channel error occurs, you can obtain further information by using SFC59 / SFB 52

to read the status in the HART response data record for the relevant client or the additional

diagnostic data record for the relevant channel.

See also

HART communication and information data records (Page 236)

4.5.7.3 HART communication and information data records

Overview

The mapping of HART commands and HART responses to S7 data records is based on the

PROFIBUS Profile HART Version 1.0

. You can find more information on the HART protocol

in the

PROFIBUS DP HART Profile Application Guidelines

You can obtain this documentation from the PNO (PROFIBUS Users Organization) on the

Internet at http://www.profibus.com.

Table 4-27 Overview

Data record

number

Read/write Size in bytes Name

148 Read 13 Directory Process Data

DR information (directory record): This data record contains the record numbers (in‐

dex) of all HART data records and information on numbers and revisions.

149 Read 3 HMD Feature Parameter Process Data

Optional HART functions (HART feature flags): This data record describes which op‐

tional HART functions are supported and specifies the maximum data field length of

the request/response records.

80, 82 Write 240 HART Request Write Process Data

HART request records to field devices: These records contain by channel (0 - 1) the

transfer data for the command from the client to the HART field device.

81, 83 Read 240 HART Response Read Process Data

HART response records from field devices: These records contain by channel (0 - 1)

the transfer data for the reply from the HART field device to the client.

Coordination rules for HART communication

HART communication can be operated only by one client per channel. Each channel has a

separate transfer area available. Each transfer area consists of the command and reply data

records.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

236 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

If a channel is operated by several clients, the reply made available by the module cannot be

securely allocated to one client. The module does not support client management, refer to data

record number 149 (HMD Feature Parameter Process Data).

● Each client / channel is allocated fixed data record numbers:

Channel Client Data record

0 Command 80

0 Response 81

1 Command 82

1 Response 83

● After having written a command data record, the client must read the response data record

before it writes the next command data record.

● The client can evaluate the "processing status" in the reply data record: if the "processing

state" indicates "successful" or "error," the data record contains current response data or

error bits respectively.

● All data must be read, because the module can modify the data record if the initial read

operation returns a successful or faulty state.

● The status component in the reply record (= HART status bytes) provides information on

whether and which errors have occurred.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 237

Structure of the command data record

The following diagram shows the structure of the data record, which you can use to write a

command in the transfer area of a client. The HART analog module transmits the command

to the connected HART field device.

 $FWLYDWH6+&VHTXHQFHWR 7UDQVSDUHQW0HVVDJH)RUPDW &RPSDFW0HVVDJH)RUPDW1XPEHURISUHDPEOHE\WHVWR&RPPDQGGDWDDFFRUGLQJWRWKH+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ/HQJWK1XPEHURIE\WHVPD[E\WHV%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH

* HART commands are processed both in Transparent Message Format and in the Compact

Message Format, see technical specification for HART. The response data from the module,

however, is always provided in the transparent format.

** Processing a sequence of HART commands as a SHC sequence (Successive HART Command

Mode)

Image 4-27 Command data record of the HART analog module

SHC sequence

If a HART command is sent to the module with a set SHC bit, then this channel is reserved for

HART commands for 2 seconds. This means that no internal HART command (command 3)

is sent to the transducer with this channel.

Each time a HART command with a set SHC bit is sent, the module once again reserves this

channel for another 2 seconds for the HART commands. If a HART command without a set

SHC bit is detected for this channel, or if no further command for this channel occurs within 2

seconds after the previous HART command, then command 3 is cyclically sent to the

transducer for reading the HART variables for the channel.

Notes on the command

The same client must not send a second command until the response to any previous

command has been read.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

238 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Notes on response

Always make sure that you are reading the current response data record.

● If the processing state in the response data record indicates "successful" or "error," the

data record contains current response data or error messages respectively.

Structure of the response data record

The following figure shows the structure of the response data record, which contains the

response to the HART command you sent previously and any error or status bits.

%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%LWV LQDFWLYH LQDFWLYHUHVHUYHG ZDLWLQJ ZDLWLQJUXQQLQJ VXFFHVVIXOZLWKGDWD VXFFHVVIXOZLWKRXWGDWD IDXOW\ZLWKGDWD IDXOW\ZLWKRXWGDWD+$57JURXSHUURUGLVSOD\VH[WHQGHGUHVSRQVHFRQWURO3URFHVVLQJVWDWXV6HHWKHWDEOHRI+$57JURXSHUURUGLVSOD\V6HHWKHWDEOHRI+$57SURWRFROHUURUVWR 6+&VHTXHQFHLVDFWLYH 6+&VHTXHQFHLVLQDFWLYH5HVSRQVHGDWDDFFRUGLQJWR+$57VSHFLILFDWLRQ+$57UHVSRQVHIUDPH/HQJWK1XPEHURIE\WHVPD[E\WHVPD[E\WHV+$57SURWRFROHUURUDWUHVSRQVHHUURUFRGHIURPILHOGGHYLFHWRPRGXOH3URFHVVLQJVWDWXVUHVSRQVHFRQWURO,IFRPPXQLFDWLRQIDXOW\,IFRPPXQLFDWLRQVXFFHVVIXO

Image 4-28 Response data record of the HART analog modules

Evaluating the response data

When you have an up-to-date response data record, you can check the following:

● Look for the "last command" entry to verify that the response belongs to the command sent.

● You can evaluate the "Group error bits" (see following table) to locate individual errors.

● You can obtain more information from "HART protocol errors during response" (see

following table) and both HART status bytes.

● In the group error bytes the corresponding bits will be set to "1".

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 239

Table 4-28 HART group error displays in response byte 1 (extended response control)

Bit no. HART group error display Meaning

0 Further status information available Corresponds to bit 4 in the channel-specific error

bytes in diagnostic data record 1 (2nd HART sta‐

tus byte). The HART command 48 provides you

with further status information, if required.

1 HART communication error --> HART

communication error entry in diagnos‐

tic data record 1

The field device has detected a communication

error while receiving the command. The error in‐

formation is contained in the 1st HART status

byte (in the reply record or diagnostic data record

1) which is accepted without changes.

2 Parameter check 0: HMD parameters unchanged

1: Check HMD parameters

3 Always 0 Reserved

4 - 7 HART protocol error for reply --> HART

communication error entry in diagnos‐

tic data record 1

Error during HART communication between field

device and module, i.e. the response was incor‐

rectly received.

0: Unspecified error

1: HMD error

2: Channel error

3: Command error

4: Query error

5: Response error

6: Query rejected

7: Profile query rejected

8: Vendor-specific query rejected

9 - 15: Not used

You can find information on the cause of the error

in response byte 2. See the table below.

Table 4-29 HART protocol error in response byte 2 for the response from the field device to the module

(error code)

Error HART protocol error in byte 2 Meaning

0 Unspecified error 0: Not specified

1 HMD error 0: Unspecified

1: Internal communication error

2: Parameter assignment error

3: HW error

4: Wait time expired

5: HART timer expired

2 Channel fault 0: Unspecified

1: Line error

2: Short circuit

3: Open line

4: Low current output

5: Parameter assignment error

3 Command error 0-127: HART protocol,

Bit 7=0

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

240 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Error HART protocol error in byte 2 Meaning

4 Query error HART protocol,

Bit 7=1

Bit 0: Reserved

Bit 1: Receive buffer overflow

Bit 2: Reserved

Bit 3: Checksum error

Bit 4: Frame error

Bit 5: Overflow error

Bit 6: Parity error

Bit 7: 1

5 Reply error HART protocol, Bit 7=1

Bit 0: GAP timeout

Bit 1: Receive buffer overflow

Bit 2: Timeout

Bit 3: Checksum error

Bit 4: Frame error

Bit 5: Overflow error

Bit 6: Parity error

Bit 7: 1

6 Query rejected 0: Unspecified

1: Short format not supported

2: SHC not supported

3: Impermissible command

4: No resources

7 Profile query rejected 0: Not specified (not supported)

8 Vendor-specific query rejected 0: Not specified (not supported)

4.5.7.4 Example of HART programming

For the HART channel 0, the command 01 is to be sent in Transparent Message Format to

the HART device with the address "98 CF 38 84 F0". A positive edge at input 4.0 of a digital

input module leads to the writing of the HART command.

The following assumptions are made:

● The module address of the HART analog module in the ET 200M is 512 (200H).

● The record is stored in DB80: starting at address 0.0, length 11 bytes.

● In this example, DB80 (request record for channel 0) consists of 11 bytes.

Table 4-30 FC80: Writing of the record to DB80 with SFC 58

STL Explanation

A I 4.0

FP M 101.0

= M 104.0

m2: CALL SFC 58

REQ :=M104.0 Write request

IOID :=B#16#54

LADDR :=W#16#200

Address range ID

Module address of the HART-AI

RECNUM :=B#16#50 Data record number 80

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 241

STL Explanation

RECORD :=P#DB80.DBX0.0 BYTE 11 Data record with length of 11 bytes

(must correspond to the exact length

that is to be transferred)

RET_VAL :=MW93

BUSY :=M51.0

U M 51.0

SPB m2

RET_VAL of SFC 58 (OK/error/...)

Write operation not yet completed

Table 4-31 DB80: Transparent Message Format

Byte Initial value (hex) Comment (Hex)

0 00 Req_Control

(00 = Transparent Message Format.

40 = Transparent Message Format with SHC sequence)

1 05 Number of preamble bytes (05-14)

2 82 Start character

(02 = Short Frame with command 0)

(82 = Long Frame with other commands)

3 98 Address

(with command 0, the address is exactly 1 byte long and

has the value 0.)

4 CF

5 38

6 84

7 F0

8 01 Command (CMD)

9 00 Length in bytes

10 98 Check sum (CHK)

(calculated starting from byte 2 "Start character" up to the

next to last byte)

A HART command can also be sent in Compact Message Format. In this case, the data that

is to be transferred via DB 80 is reduced to 4 bytes.

Table 4-32 DB80: Compact Message Format

Byte Initial value (hex) Comment (Hex)

0 20 Req_Control

(20 = Compact Message Format.

60 = Compact Message Format with SHC sequence)

1 05 Number of preamble bytes (05-14)

2 01 Command (CMD)

3 00 Length in bytes

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

242 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

You can find out when the reply was received by cyclically reading record DS81 for HART

channel 0. The response is always supplied in Transparent Message Format.

Table 4-33 FC81: Reading of the reply to DB81 with SFC 59

STL Explanation

m3: CALL SFC 59

REQ :=1 Read request

IOID :=B#16#54

LADDR :=W#16#200

Address range ID

Module address of the HART-AI

RECNUM :=B#16#51 Data record number 81

RECORD :=P#DB81.DBX0.0 BYTE 75 Data record

RET_VAL :=MW100

BUSY :=M49.1

U M 49.1

SPB m3

RET_VAL of SFC 59 (OK/error/...)

Read operation not yet completed

The program part U M 49.1 to SPB m3 is only required if reading is to occur synchronously.

As long as "0x03" is in byte 0 of DB81, the reply has not been received from the field device.

Once bit 2 = 1 in byte 0, positive response data are available from field devices, which you

can evaluate.

If the response data is invalid, see Tables "HART group error displays in response byte 1

(extended response control)" or "HART protocol error in response byte 2 in response from the

field device to the module (error code)" in this manual.

4.5.7.5 User data interface

User data interface - input area (read)

Structure of the user data

The figure below shows the structure of the input user data area of the HART analog modules

beginning with the correspondingly configured module address.

If you have configured HART variables, then these are made available justified after byte 15.

Each configured HART variable uses 5 input bytes, see section 4.5.1.

You can read in the data of the user data area (e.g. with L PEW 256) and evaluate it in your

user program.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 243

&KDQQHO$QDORJLQSXWYDOXHIRU$,+$575HDGEDFNYDOXHIRU$2+$57&KDQQHO$QDORJLQSXWYDOXHIRU$,+$575HDGEDFNYDOXHIRU$2+$57+$57YDULDEOH4XDOLW\FRGH9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW9DOXHLQ6IRUPDW9DOXHLQIORDWLQJSRLQWIRUPDWE\WHV,(((%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH9DOXHLQ+H[IRUPDW+$57SULPDU\YDULDEOHFKDQQHOIUHH +$57YDULDEOH4XDOLW\FRGH9DOXHLQIORDWLQJSRLQWIRUPDWE\WHV,(((%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH%\WH9DOXHLQ+H[IRUPDW+$57SULPDU\YDULDEOHFKDQQHOIUHH 

Image 4-29 Input user data area of the HART analog modules

User data interface, output range (writing)

Structure of the user data

The figure below shows the structure of the output user data area of the HART analog output

module beginning with the correspondingly configured module address. You can transfer the

data to the user data area in a permissible format (e.g. with T PAW 256).

Both the analog input as well as the analog output occupy 16 bytes in the output area. In the

case of the analog input, writing has no effect.

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

244 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Image 4-30 User data area of the HART analog output module

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 245

SIMATIC S7 HART Analog Modules

4.5 HART Analog Modules - Revision 7

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

246 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Certificates A

A.1 Overview of diagnostic functions

Introduction

The EU special test certificates and EU certificates of conformity for the modules described in

this manual can be found on the Internet: (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/

en/37217116/134200)

Example

In the "Entry list" tab, select under filter settings:

● Entry type: Certificates

● Certificate Type: Certificates of conformity

● Search item(s): 6ES7321-7RB00-0AB0

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 247

Certificates

A.1 Overview of diagnostic functions

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

248 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Standards and licenses B

B.1 Standards and licenses

Introduction

In this section you will find

● standards and test values satisfied by modules of the S7-300 automation system and ET

200M.

● test criteria according to which the S7-300/ET 200M Ex I/O modules were tested.

CE mark

0344

The automation system S7-300/ET 200M satisfies the requirements and protection goals of

the following EC directives, and conforms with the harmonized European standards (EN) for

programmable logic controllers announced in the Official Journals of the European Community:

● 2006/95/EC "Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage Limits" (Low‐

voltage Directive)

● 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)

● 94/9/EC "Equipment and Protective Systems for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres"

(Directive for Explosion Protection)

The EC Declarations of Conformity are available to the responsible authorities at:

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik

Industry Sector I IA AS R&D DH A

Postfach 1963

D-92209 Amberg, Germany

These files are also available for download on the Customer Support Internet pages, under

"Declaration of Conformity" on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/

en/37217116/134200).

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 249

Safety standards used

The following safety standards apply to all EX modules:

● EN 60079-0:

Electrical equipment for hazardous locations:

General specifications.

● EN 60079-11:

Electrical equipment for hazardous locations:

Intrinsic safety "i".

● DIN EN 61010 (part 1 v. 3/94):

Safety regulations for electrical measuring and control devices and

laboratory equipment.

● DIN EN 61131 (part 2 v. 5/95):

Programmable logic controllers, operational equipment requirements and testing.

● DIN EN 60204 (part 1 v. 6/93):

Electrical equipment of machines:

General requirements.

Safety-related characteristic values:

UoMaximum output voltage

IoMaximum output current

UmMaximum r.m.s. power-frequency voltage or maximum direct voltage

CoMaximum external capacitance

LoMaximum external inductance

PoMaximum output power

CiMaximum internal capacitance

LiMaximum internal inductance

cULus HAZ. LOC. approval

+$=/2&

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with

● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

● UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)

● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

● CSA C22.2 No. 213 (Hazardous Location)

Standards and licenses

B.1 Standards and licenses

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

250 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

APPROVED for use in

Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4;

Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Note the following information.

Note

This product must be installed according to the NEC (National Electric Code) stipulations.

When used in environments according to class I, division 2 (see above), ET 200M must be

mounted in an enclosure that corresponds to at least IP54 according to EN 60529.

WARNING

Installation Instructions according cULus

WARNING – Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known

to be non-hazardous.

WARNING – Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class

I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D; Class I, Zone

2, Group IIC, or non-hazardous locations only.

FM approval

Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with

Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810

APPROVED for use in

Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4;

Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4

Note

This product must be installed according to the NEC (National Electric Code) CEC (Canadian

Electric Code) stipulations.

Standards and licenses

B.1 Standards and licenses

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 251

WARNING

Installation Instructions according cULus

WARNING – Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known

to be non-hazardous.

WARNING – Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class

I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D; Class I, Zone

2, Group IIC, or non-hazardous locations only.

ATEX approval

In accordance with EN 60079-15 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres;

Type of protection "n") and EN 60079-11 (Type of protection "i") and EN 60079-0 (Electrical

apparatus for potentially explosive gas atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements)

II 3G (2) GD

Ex nA [ib Gb] [ib Db] IIC T4 Gc

Marking for Australia

The S7-300/ET 200M automation system meets the requirements of the

EN 61000-6-4 standard.

IEC 61131

The S7-300/ET 200M automation system meets the requirements and criteria of the IEC

61131-2 standard (programmable controllers, Part 2: Equipment Requirements and Tests).

Standards and licenses

B.1 Standards and licenses

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

252 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Marine approval

Classification authorities:

● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)

● BV (Bureau Veritas)

● DNV (Det Norske Veritas)

● GL (Germanischer Lloyd)

● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)

● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

Use in industrial environment

SIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environments.

Table B-1 Use in industrial environment

Area of application Requirement for

Interference emission Interference immunity

Industry EN 61000-6-4: 2007 EN 61000-6-2: 2005

Use in residential areas

Note

The S7-300/Et 200M is designed for use in industrial areas; using it in residential areas could

disturb radio and TV reception.

If you use the S7-300/ET 200M in residential areas, you must ensure that the radio interference

emissions comply with limit value class B in accordance with EN 61000-6-3.

Suitable measures for achieving RF interference Limit Class B include, for example:

● Install S7-300/ET 200M in grounded switching cabinets/boxes

● Use of filters in supply lines

Standards and licenses

B.1 Standards and licenses

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 253

Standards and licenses

B.1 Standards and licenses

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

254 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Service & support C

C.1 Service & support

Technical support

You can contact technical support for all A&D products using the online (http://

www.siemens.com/automation/support-request) Support Request form.

Additional information on our technical support is available on the Internet (http://

www.siemens.com/automation/service).

Service & support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive knowledge base on the Internet.

On the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).

There you will find:

● Our Newsletter, which constantly provides you with the latest information about your

products.

● The documents you require, via our service & support search facility.

● A forum, where users and experts from all over the world exchange their experiences.

● Your local contact for Automation & Drives from our contact database.

● Information about on-site service, repairs, spare parts, and much more.

Additional support

If you have any questions relating to the products described in this manual and cannot find the

answers in this documentation, please contact your Siemens partner at the appropriate office

or sales and service location.

The contact details for your partner are available on the Internet (http://

www.automation.siemens.com/partner/).

A guide to the technical documentation provided for the various SIMATIC products and

systems is available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal).

The online catalog and order system is available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/

automation/mall).

Training center

Siemens offers various courses to get you started with the S7-300 and the SIMATIC S7

automation system. Please contact your regional training center or the central training center

in Nuremberg (ZIP code: 90327).

Additional information is available on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain).

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 255

Service & support

C.1 Service & support

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

256 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Glossary

--> Automation system

Automation system

An automation system is a programmable logic controller which consists at least of one → CPU,

various I/O modules, and operating and monitoring devices.

Backplane bus

The backplane bus is a serial data bus through which the modules communicate with one

another and through which they are supplied with the necessary voltage. The connection

between the modules is created by the bus connector.

The --> I/O bus is a component of the backplane bus.

Backplane bus active

Backplane bus of the distributed I/O system --> ET 200M, which is made of active bus modules.

This is the prerequisite for a configuration with which "inserting and removing" is permitted

during operation.

Baud rate

The baud rate is the speed at which data is transferred. It indicates the number of bits

transferred per second (baud rate = bit rate).

With → ET 200 baud rates of 9.6 kBaud up to 12 MBaud are possible.

Bus

Transmission path with two defined ends, shared by all interconnected nodes.

With → ET 200 the bus is a two-wire line or a fiber-optic cable.

Bus user

Device which can send, receive and amplify signals via the → bus, for example; → DP master,

→ DP slave, RS485 Repeater, active star coupler.

CELENEC

European Committee for Electrical Standards

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 257

CiR

CiR (Configuration in RUN) stands for system modification in RUN. System modification in

RUN by means of CiR allows the configuration of units of an active system with distributed I/

O. Process execution is interrupted for the duration of a brief, assignable period. The process

inputs retain their last value during this time period.

Client

A client can request a service from a --> server. A client can, for example, be a program, a

central module (CPU) or a station (e.g. PC). The client and server can exchange data via

→PROFIBUS DP by means of →master-slave process, for example. A separate transfer

channel can be assigned to each client to coordinate data exchange between several clients

and the server, for example.

Configuration

Assigning modules to subracks / slots and addresses. A distinction is made between actual

configuration (= actual inserted modules) and calculated configuration. You stipulate the

calculated configuration with the help of STEP 7, COM PROFIBUS. The operating system can

thus detect any incorrect assembly at startup.

Configuring (initialize, assign parameters to)

Included in parameterization is the setting of the behavior of a module or a --> field device by

parameters.

CPU

Central processing unit = CPU of the S7 automation system with a control and arithmetic unit,

memory, operating system, and interface for programming device.

Diagnostic interrupt

Modules which support diagnostics interrupts report system errors detected to the central →

CPU.

In SIMATIC S7/M7: With the detection or disappearance of an error (e.g. wire break), the

module triggers a diagnostics interrupt provided this interrupt is enabled. The --> CPU

interrupts the processing of the user program or low-priority classes and processes the

diagnostic interrupt module (OB82).

In SIMATIC S5: The diagnostic interrupt is reproduced within the device-related -->

diagnostics. It can detect errors, like for example, wire breaks, by means of the cyclic querying

of the diagnostics bit in the device-related diagnostics.

Diagnostics

The detection, localization, classification, visualization and further evaluation of errors,

disturbances and messages.

Glossary

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

258 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Diagnostics offers monitoring functions that automatically run while the system is in operation.

This hence increases the availability of systems by reducing the installation and down times.

Diagnostics buffer

The diagnostics buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU in which diagnostics events can

be stored in the order of occurrence.

Distributed I/Os

Represent I/O units which are installed at distributed locations at a greater distance to the →

CPU, instead of being implemented in the central rack. Examples:

● ET 200M, ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200U

● DP/AS-I Link

● S5-95U with PROFIBUS-DP slave interface

● further → DP slaves by Siemens or other manufacturers

The distributed I/Os are connected via --> PROFIBUS-DP with the --> DP master.

DP address

Each → bus node must be assigned a unique DP address for → PROFIBUS DP.

PC/PG or the ET 200 hand-helds have the DP address "0".

→ DP-Master and → DP slaves have a DP address from the range 1 to 125.

DP master

A master that complies with the

IEC 61784–1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1

standard is known as a DP

master.

DP slave

A slave running on the PROFIBUS using the PROFIBUS DP protocol in accordance with

IEC

61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1

is known as a DP slave.

DP standard

The DP standard is the bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed I/O system in accordance with

IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1

Dynamic parameters

In contrast to static parameters, dynamic parameters of modules can be changed dynamically

by the user program.

Glossary

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 259

Electrically isolated

Electrically isolated I/O modules are isolated from the → reference potentials of the control and

load circuit by means of optocoupler, relay contact or transformer circuits. I/O circuits can be

interconnected with a root circuit.

Error handling via OB

If the operating system detects a specific error (e.g. →access fault with STEP 7), it calls up the

respective --> organization block (error OB) for this case, in which the further behavior --> of

the CPU can be established.

ET 200

The distributed I/O system ET 200 with → PROFIBUS DP protocol is a → bus system for

interconnecting distributed I/O with a → CPU or for interconnecting adequate → DP master. ET

200 features high-speed → reaction times as the system only transfers a low data volume

(bytes).

ET 200 is based on the standard EN 50170, Volume 2, --> PROFIBUS.

ET 200 works in accordance with the master slave principle. → DP-Masters can, for example,

be the master connection IM 308-C or the CPU 315-2 DP.

→ DP slaves can be distributed I/Os ET 200B, ET 200C, ET 200M, ET 200U or DP slaves by

Siemens or other manufacturers.

Fault indication

The fault indication is one of the possible reactions of the operating system to a --> runtime

error. The other reaction possibilities are: → Error reaction in the user program, STOP state of

the → CPU or of IM 153-1.

Fault reaction

Reaction to a runtime error. The operating system can react in the following ways: Put the

programmable controller in the STOP state, call up a --> organization block, whereby the user

can program a reaction, or display an error.

Field

This can be an area of the plant outside the control room where measured values can be

obtained through communication or manipulated values can be sent to actuators.

Or part of a message, e.g. address field or command field, that is dedicated to a particular

function. The dimensions or other regulations for the interpretation of each field are part of the

protocol specification.

Field device

A → transducer, that is located on the → field and exchanges communication data with the

central system.

Glossary

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

260 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Field device, intelligent (smart device)

A field device with more complex functionality, which includes a microprocessor and the

functions of which can be set via a respective --> parameter assignment toll by the control

room.

FM Approvals, American certification organization for products

frequency shift keying (FSK)

is a data modulation technique that is suitable for the data transport via normal lines. Two

audio frequencies are used for this, in order to code the binary "0" and "1" in the frequency

range 300 - 3000 Hz. With → HART protocol the FSK signal is transmitted via a current loop.

FSK

Frequency Shift Keying →Frequency shift keying

Ground

The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point.

Ground potential may be different from zero in the area of grounding electrodes. The term

reference ground is frequently used to describe this situation.

One or more conductive parts that can have very good contact with the ground.

Chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected passive parts of a piece of equipment

on which dangerous fault-voltage cannot occur.

Ground

The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point.

Ground potential may be different from zero in the area of grounding electrodes. The term

reference ground is frequently used to describe this situation.

One or more conductive parts that can have very good contact with the ground.

Chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected passive parts of a piece of equipment

on which dangerous fault-voltage cannot occur.

Ground

The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point.

Ground potential may be different from zero in the area of grounding electrodes. The term

reference ground is frequently used to describe this situation.

One or more conductive parts that can have very good contact with the ground.

Glossary

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 261

Chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected passive parts of a piece of equipment

on which dangerous fault-voltage cannot occur.

HART

Highway Addressable Remote Transducer. HART is a registered trademark of the --> HART

Communication Foundation.

HART analog modules

Analog modules which, in addition to their analog value, can carry out --> HART

communication. HART analog modules can be used as --> HART interfaces for HART field

devices.

HART commands

The HART field device works as a slave and is controlled by the master by means of HART

commands. The master sets the --> HART parameters or requests data in the form of --> HART

responses.

HART communication

Transmitting data between a master (e.g. HART analog module) and a slave (--> HART field

device) via the --> HART protocol.

HART Communication Foundation

The HART Communication Foundation (HCF) was founded in 1993 in order to market and

further develop the HART protocol. The HCF is an establishment that is not focused on profits

and it is financed by its members.

HART field device

Smart device with additional → HART-compatible functionality to enable interpretation of the

→ HART communication functions.

HART hand-held

The HART hand-held includes the original parameter assignment tool by Fisher-Rosemount

Ltd. for --> HART field devices, which is directly linked to its connections. The --> HART

parameters are set using the HART hand-held.

Glossary

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

262 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

HART interface

Part of a system with which a --> HART field device can be connected. The HART interface

represents the master for the field device. With reference to the system, the HART interface

however is a slave that can supply the system via various masters. A master represents, e.g.

the --> HART parameter assignment tool. The programmable controller is itself a different

master.

HART parameter

The HART parameters call the configurable features of --> HART field devices, which can be

changed via the --> HART protocol. The setting takes place via a --> HART parameter

assignment tool.

HART parameter assignment tool

The HART parameter assignment tool is used to comfortably set the --> HART parameters. It

can be a --> HART hand-held or a parameter assignment tool that is integrated in the system,

e.g. SIMATIC SIPROM.

HART protocol

The → HART protocol is the industry standard for expanded communication with --> HART

field devices. It includes the --> HART commands and the --> HART responses.

HART responses

The HART field devices transmits data upon the request of the master. These data represent

measurement results, manipulated values or the values of → HART parameters. A HART

response always includes a status information, the --> HART status byte.

HART signal

Analog signal on a current loop from 4 - 20 mA, where the aid of the --> FSK procedure, the

sinus waves for the --> HART protocol, 1200 Hz for the binary "1" and 2200 Hz for the binary

"0" can be modulated.

HART status byte

The status information that consists of the 1st and 2nd status byte of the --> HART response

and with which the HART field device offers information via the --> HART communication, the

receipt of the --> HART command and the device status.

HART transfer area

Area of data records that are established for writing HART commands and reading HART

responses with the HART analog modules. The HART transfer area consists of records. Each

--> client is assigned its own range of data records, with which the --> server can exchange

data with the client.

Glossary

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 263

HCF

--A HART Communication Foundation

I/O bus

Component of the --> S7-300 backplane bus in the --> programmable controller system,

optimized at the fast exchange of signals between the IM 153 and the signal modules. The I/

O bus is used to transfer → process data, such as digital input signals of a signal module and

system data, such as the → default parameter records of a signal module.

Interrupt

The operating system of the --> CPU recognizes 10 different priority classes that regulate the

editing of the user program. These priority classes include interrupts (e.g. hardware interrupts).

When an interrupt is triggered, the operating system automatically calls an assigned OB in

which the user can program the desired reaction.

KEMA

Certification office for products

Load mains device

Power supply to the signal / function modules and the process I/O connected to them.

Master class 1

--> Master that carries out the user data traffic and with which the configuration and diagnostics

of the distributed I/Os takes place.

Master class 2

--> Master for controlling / installing and configuration tasks, e.g. configuring and diagnostics

of the field devices that are connected to the distribution I/Os.

Master slave procedure

Bus access method where only one node is → DP master, and all other nodes are → DP slaves.

Masters

A master station which is in possession of the token can send data to other nodes and request

data from those (= active node.)

→ DP-Masters can, for example, be the master connection IM 308-C or the CPU 315-2 DP.

Glossary

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

264 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Measuring-point tag

Unique identifier for the measuring point, consisting of 8 characters. It is saved in the --> HART

field device and can be changed and read off via the --> HART command.

modem

A modem (modulator / demodulator) is a device that converts binary digital signals into -->

FSK signals and vice-versa. A modem doesn´t code data, it offers a conversion of the physical

form of the signals.

Module parameters

Module parameters are values using which the behavior of the module can be modified. We

distinguish between static and dynamic module parameters.

Monodrop

In a monodrop communication system a maximum of two devices are linked to the same

transmission path, e.g. channel of the HART analog module and --> HART field device. The

--> HART protocol and the analog signal can be used simultaneously with this procedure. (By

contrast, a communication system with more than two devices has the multidrop feature)

Non-isolated

The → reference potentials of non-isolated I/O modules and of the control and load circuit are

interconnected electrically.

--> organization block

organization blocks

form the interface between the operating system of the S7-CPU and the user program. The

sequence of processing the user program is established in the organization blocks.

Parameter assignment tool

A SW tool using which the parameters e.g. of an --> intelligent field device can be set.

Potentially explosive atmosphere

This is an area in which there is an explosion hazard or where due to local and operating

conditions a dangerous explosive atmosphere can occur.

Glossary

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 265

Primary variable

Variable for the master measured value of a HART analog input, for example, pressure. The

→HART field devices also support the implementation of other measuring processes, for

example temperature measurements, and save the results to the second, third, or fourth

variable and so forth. With a HART analog output the primary variable includes the manipulated

variable.

Process image

Special memory area of the → automation system. At the start of the cyclic program the signal

states of the input modules are transferred to the process image of the inputs. At the end of

the cyclic program the process image of the outputs is transferred as a signal state to the

output modules.

Process interrupt

A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-capable S7-300 modules due to a certain event

in the process. Process interrupts are reported to the central → CPU. The assigned organization

block is then processed according to the priority of this interrupt.

In SIMATIC S7/M7: The range is defined by parameterization of an upper and a lower limit.

The module triggers a process interrupt if the process signal of an analog signal module such

as the temperature is out of this working range, provided limit value interrupts are enabled.

The → CPU interrupts execution of the user program or of jobs of a lower priority class in order

to execute process interrupt OB 40.

In SIMATIC S5: The process interrupt is mapped within the device-specific → diagnostics

function. You can identify errors such as violation of limits by means of cyclic polling of the

diagnostics bits in the device-specific diagnostics data.

PROFIBUS

PROcess FIeld BUS. This is an international process and fieldbus standard as defined in

IEC

61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1

. Specifies the functional, electrical and mechanical characteristics

of a serial bit stream field bus system.

PROFIBUS is a bus system that connects PROFIBUS compatible automation systems and

field devices on a cell and field level.

PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP (= Distributed Peripherals), FMS (= Fieldbus

Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation), or TF (= Technological Functions).

PTB

Physical Technical Federal Organization, Certification Office for Products

Reaction time

The reaction time is the average time that elapses between the changing of an input and the

associated changing of an output.

Glossary

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

266 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Reference potential

Reference potential for the evaluation / measuring of the voltages of participating circuits.

Runtime error

Error that occurs during the editing of the user program in the --> programmable controller

(also no in the process).

S7-300 backplane bus

Backplane bus for the S7-300 system. The same backplane bus can also be used for the

distributed I/O system --> ET 200M. There the use of the active backplane bus is also possible

(--> backplane bus, active)

Server

A server provides a service upon request. A server can, for example, be a program, a module

or a station (e.g. PC). The data exchange between the --> A client and server can, for example,

take place via PROFIBUS-DP in the --> master slave procedure.

SFC

--> system function

Signal module

Signal modules form the interface between the process and the automation system. There are

digital input and output modules as well as analog input and output modules.

Slave

A slave can only exchange data with the master upon request from the same.

--> signal module

Static parameters

Unlike dynamic parameters, static parameters of modules cannot be changed by the user

program. You can only modify these parameters in STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS.

Structure, central

In a centralized configuration, the process I/O devices and central module are located in the

same rack or in expansion units in the same or a neighboring cabinet.

Glossary

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 267

Structure, distributed

The process I/O of a distributed configuration is not installed directly alongside with the CPU

in the same rack or in the same/adjacent cabinet. Distributed I/Os are installed at remote

locations and interconnected via communication bus system.

Substitute value

Substitute values are values which are output by faulty signal output modules to the process,

or used to substitute a process value of a faulty signal input module in the user program. The

substitute values can be set by the user (for example, retain old values)

System diagnostics

System diagnostics is the detection, evaluation and the report of errors that occur within the

programmable controller. Examples for such errors are: Program errors or failure of modules.

System errors can be displayed with LED displays or in the STEP 7.

System function

A system function is a function integrated in the operating system of the --> CPU which upon

request can be called up in the STEP 7 user program.

Terminating resistor

power adaptation resistor connected to the bus cable. Always required at the end of cables or

segments.

The → ET 200 bus connectors are equipped with switched terminating resistors.

Timeout

If an expected event does not occur within a specified time, this time is known as a "timeout".

In the --> HART protocol there is a timeout for the response of a slave to a message from the

master and for the pause after each transaction.

Transducer

Sensor, measuring transducer, actuator or final control element. A transducer can be

implemented by means of a →smart device.

User data

User data is exchanged between a central module and signal module, function module and

communication modules via the process image or via direct access. User data could be: digital

and analog input/output signals from signal modules, control and status information from

function modules.

Glossary

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

268 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Index

"Intrinsic safety" terminals, 32

2-wire transducer

connecting, 115

Ranges of measurement, 150

4-wire transducer

connecting, 115

Measuring ranges, 172

Ranges of measurement, 150

ADU error, (See Causes of error and remedies)

Analog digital conversion, 119

analog input module

Conversion time, 118

Cycle time, 119

electrically isolated, 104

Parameterization, 120

Analog input module

Diagnostic data records, 132

Diagnostics, 124

Interrupt, 128

Operating state of the CPU, influence, 130

Range of values, 131

Supply voltage, influence, 130

Analog input, measurement range, 87

analog output module

electrically isolated, 117

Analog output module

Conversion time, 119

Cycle time, 119

Diagnostic data records, 132

Diagnostics, 124

Interrupt, 128

Operating state of the CPU, influence, 130

Parameterization, 120

Range of values, 131

Response time, 120

Supply voltage, influence, 130

Transient recovery time, 120

Analog signal, line, 111, 117

Analog value, 87

Analog value representation, 87

Climatic temperature range, 92

Climatic temperature range Ni 100, 93

Current measuring range, 89

Current output ranges, 102

Resistance sensor, 90

Standard temperature range Ni 100, 92

Temperature range encoder types, 94

Temperature range standard, 91

Voltage measuring range, 89

Approval, 11

ATEX, 252

CE, 249

Domestic, 253

FM, 251

FM approval, 12

Industry, 253

Marine, 253

Approvals, 4

ATEX approval, 252

Australia, marking, 252

Auxiliary voltage, (See Causes of error and remedies)

Backplane bus, 13

Basic knowledge, required, 3

Bit, noise-prone, 88

Block diagram

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 56

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA, 68

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA, 80

cable bedding, 26

Cable routing in Ex systems, 24

Cables

Cable routing in the cable bedding, 26

Marking, 26

Overview of requirements, 27

selection, 28

Shielding, 41

Types of cables, 29

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 269

Causes of error and remedies

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 63

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 75

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 75

SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 126, 174

SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA, 126

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 126

SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA, 127

CE mark, 249

Certificates of conformity, 247

Changes since the previous edition of the manual, 3

Climatic, Ni 100, temperature range, 93

Climatic, temperature range, 92

compensation box, 114

Compensation box, 107

Compensation with thermocouples

external, 114

internal, 114

Configuration tool

HART, 166

IM 153-2, 167

IM 153-4, 167

Connect voltage transducer, 115

connecting

2-wire transducer, 115

4-wire transducer, 115

Ex I/O modules, 13

Line chamber, 14

Resistance thermometer, 111

Transducers, 103

Connecting

loads/actuators, 117

Thermocouple, 106

Voltage sensor, 115

Connecting actuators, 117

Connecting loads, 117

Connection system, 102

Conversion time

analog input module, 118

Analog output module, 119

CPU error, (See Causes of error and remedies)

C-tick mark, 4

Current output range, analog value

representation, 102

Cycle time

analog input module, 119

Analog output module, 119

Data record format

Additional diagnostics, HART field devices, 198

Additional parameters for HART, 200

Diagnostics of the HART analog input, 192, 234

HART communication, 194, 236

Data record interface

HART analog module, 189, 229

Parameter, 190, 231

Diagnostic data record

Structure, analog modules, 132

Structure, digital modules, 84

Diagnostic interrupt, 129

Diagnostic messages, (See Causes of error and

remedies)

Diagnostics

Analog modules general, 124

Data records, analog modules, 132

Data records, digital modules, 84

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 62

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 75

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 75

SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 125, 174, 209

SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA, 125

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 125

SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA, 127

Diagnostics of the HART analog input

Data record DS0 / DS1, 192, 234

Data record DS1, 193, 235

Data record format, 192, 234

Digital module

Diagnostic data records, 84

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 53

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 77

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 66

Disposal, 4

Distribution of plants, 40

DM 370 dummy module

combined use, 13

Installation information, 17

Documentation structure, 4

Electrical isolation, 104

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), 38

EPROM error, (See Causes of error and remedies)

Equipment Shielding, 33

Equipotential bonding

additional, 23

General, 21

in a building, 22

Lightning protection, 41

Main equipotential bonding, 23

Index

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

270 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

ET 200M

Distribution, 40

Installation information for Ex I/O, 20

Ex area, (See Potentially explosive atmosphere)

Ex I/O module

connecting, 13

Design of ET 200M with an example, 20

replacing, 13

S7-300 installation information, 17

Safety standards, 250

Ex installation

Zone 1, 47

Zone 2, 47

Ex lines

Shielding, 36

Ex partition, 13, 20

Ex systems

Guideline, 11

Wiring and cabling, 24

example

HART configuration, 168

Lightning/overvoltage protection for a gas

compressor station, 43

Field devices for HART, 163, 166, 198

FM approval, 251

Functional extra low voltage, safe, 12

Fuse blown, (See Causes of error and remedies)

Grounding

Inactive metal parts, 37

intrinsically safe circuits, 35

Guideline

Ex systems, 11

HART communication, 194, 236

Hardware interrupt

HART analog module, 175, 215

Hardware interrupt lost, (See Causes of error and

remedies)

HART, 163

application, 166

Configuration tool, 166

Diagnostic messages, 209

Example of commands, 165

Example of parameters, 165

functions, 164

Group error, 197

Introduction, 163

Protocol error, 197

Status bytes, 166, 175

System environment, 166

User data format input, 202, 243

various diagnostic messages, 174

HART - modifying parameters, (See Causes of error

and remedies)

HART analog module

Data record interface, 189, 229

Diagnostics, 174, 209

Example configuration, 168

HART measurement, 173

Installation, 169

Interrupt, 175, 215

Intrinsically safe installation, 169

Operating phase, 170

Reassign parameters, 170

Use in PROFIBUS DP, 162

User data, 189, 229

HART communication

Command, data record, 195, 238

Data record format, 194, 236

Response, data record, 196, 239

HART data records

Additional diagnostics for field devices, 198

Additional parameters, 200

Communications, 194, 236

Diagnostics, 192, 234

Input parameter, 190, 231

Output parameter, 191, 232

User data, output, 203, 244

HART group error, 197, (See Causes of error and

remedies)

HART operating phase

Field devices, 170

User data, 170

HART protocol, 164

HART protocol error, 197

HART response

Data record format, 196, 239

evaluating, 196, 239

HART signal

FSK procedure, 164

Influence with transducers, 150

HART status bytes, 175, 197

Index

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 271

IEC 61131, 252

Incorrect parameters, (See Causes of error and

remedies)

Installation

General information, 17

Racks, spacing, 18

Zone 1, 47

Zone 2, 47

Installation of the HART analog module, 169

interference voltage, 36

Interrupts

Analog modules, 128

HART analog modules, 175, 215

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 64

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 76

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 76

Intrinsic safety, 32

Intrinsically safe electrical circuit

Cable routing requirements, 24

Grounding, 35

Intrinsically safe installation, (See module in question)

Lightning protection

Equipotential bonding, 41

Lightning Protection, 39

external, 40

internal, 41

Lightning strike, measures, 45

Line

Analog signals, 111, 117

Cable routing in the cable bedding, 26

Characteristic value of intrinsically safe

circuits, 32

Marking, 26

Overview of requirements, 27

selection, 28

Type designations, 30

Line chamber, 14

Line shielding, 34

Load current circuit, 13

Load voltage missing, (See Causes of error and

remedies)

Maintaining equipment, 50

Manual

Changes, 3

Contents, 4

Purpose, 3

Marine approval, 253

Marking

Cables, 26

Line, 26

Marking for Australia, 252

Measured value resolution, 88

Measured value table, 88

Measurement

Resistance sensor, 111

Resistance thermometer, 111

Measurement of current, measuring ranges,

overview, 89

measures

to counteract overvoltage, 39

Measures

Eliminating the risk of explosion, 46

Safety Measures, 45

to counteract, 36

with a lightning strike, 45

Measuring ranges

HART analog input, 190, 231

HART analog output, 191, 232

Undershoot, (See Causes of error and remedies)

Violation, (See Causes of error and remedies)

Module not configured, (See Causes of error and

remedies)

Operating state of the CPU, influence

Analog modules, 130

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 65

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA, 77

Order number

6ES7331-7TB00-0AB0, 176

6ES7331-7TB10-0AB0, 215

6ES7332-5TB00-0AB0, 183

6ES7332-5TB10-0AB0, 223

all at a glance, 3

Order Number

6ES7321-7RD00-0AB0, 53

6ES7322-5RD00-0AB0, 77

6ES7322-5SD00-0AB0, 66

6ES7331-7RD00-0AB0, 146

6ES7331-7SF00-0AB0, 135

6ES7332-5RD00-0AB0, 154

Index

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

272 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Overvoltage Protection, 42

Example gas compressor station, 43

in intrinsically safe circuits, 42

parameter

Additional parameters for HART, data record

format, 200

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 73

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 73

SM 331; AI 4 x 4/0...20 mA, 123

SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 123

Parameter

HART data records, 190, 231

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 60

SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 171

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 121

SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 173

Parameterization

HART access rights, 171

Interrupt, 128

Partition, 13

Potentially explosive atmosphere

Eliminating the risk of explosion, 46

Ex installation in zone 1, 47

Ex installation in zone 2, 47

Safety measures for mounting, 45

Power supply, 13

Process interrupt

Analog modules, 129

PROFIBUS DP with HART analog modules, 162

RAM error, (See Causes of error and remedies)

Range of values, influence on output, 131

Ranges of measurement

2-wire transducer, 150

4-wire transducer, 150

Analog input, 87

Resistance measurement, 139

Voltage measurement, 139

Recycling, 4

Reference channel fault, (See Causes of error and

remedies)

Reference junction, 113

Replacing equipment, 50

Replacing Ex I/O modules, 13

Requirements

Cables, 27

Line, 27

terminals, 32

Resistance measurement SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x

RTD, 138

Resistance sensor

Analog value representation, 90

Measurement, 111

Resistance thermometer, 111

Response time, analog output module, 120

S7 Ex analog modules, 11, 87

S7 Ex digital modules, 11, 53

S7 Ex-HART analog modules, 11, 161

S7-300

Installation information for Ex I/O, 17

Wiring of the Ex I/O, 18

Safety, 250

Safety measures for mounting, 45

Safety standards Ex modules, 250

Service & support, 255

Shielding

building, 40, 41

Cables, 41

Definition, 33

Equipment, 33

Ex lines, 36

Line, 34

Systems with optimal equipotential bonding, 34

Shielding of buildings, 41

Short-circuit to M, (See Causes of error and remedies)

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 53

Block diagram, 56

Causes of error and remedies, 63

Diagnostics, 62

Features, 53

Interrupts, 64

Intrinsically safe installation, 55

Parameter, 60

Parameterization, 59

technical specifications, 56

Wiring diagram, 55

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 77

Features, 78

Interrupts, 76

Intrinsically safe installation, 79

technical specifications, 80

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA

Block diagram, 68

Wiring diagram, 67

Index

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 273

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA

Features, 66

Interrupts, 76

Intrinsically safe installation, 67

parameter, 73

Parameterization, 72

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA

Block diagram, 80

Parameter, 73

Wiring diagram, 79

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA

Causes of error and remedies, 75

Diagnostics, 75

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA, 66

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA

Causes of error and remedies, 75

Diagnostics, 75

Technical specifications, 69

SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 176, 215

Causes of error and remedies, 126, 174

Diagnostics, 125, 174, 209

Features, 176, 216

Parameter, 171

Technical specifications, 179, 219

Wiring diagram, 178, 218

SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 146

Features, 146

Intrinsically safe installation, 148

Parameter, 123

technical specifications, 151

Wire-break monitoring, 150

Wiring diagram, 148

SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20mA

Causes of error and remedies, 126

Diagnostics, 125

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 135

Features, 135

Intrinsically safe installation, 137

Thermocouples, 139

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD

Causes of error and remedies, 126

Diagnostics, 125

Parameter, 121

Resistance measurement, 138

technical specifications, 140

Wire-break monitoring, 139

Wiring diagram, 136

SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 183, 223

Features, 183, 223

Parameter, 173

Technical specifications, 186, 226

Wire break check, 184, 224

Wiring diagram, 185, 225

SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 154

Features, 154

Intrinsically safe installation, 155

Parameter, 123

technical specifications, 157

Wiring diagram, 155

SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20mA

Causes of error and remedies, 127

Diagnostics, 127

Spacing on subracks, 18

Sparks capable of causing ignition, 46

Standard Ni 100 temperature range, 92

Standard, temperature range, 91

Standards, 4

Supply voltage, influence

Analog modules, 130

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 65

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 77

technical specifications

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 56

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20mA, 80

SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 151

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 140

SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 157

Technical specifications

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10mA, 69

SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 179, 219

SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 186, 226

Temperature ranges, analog value representation

Climatic, 92

Climatic, Ni 100, 93

Encoder types, 94

Standard, 91

Standard Ni 100, 92

Thermocouple

Compensation at terminals, 109

Compensation box, 107

Compensation with RTD, 110

external compensation, 106, 110, 114

General information, 112

Internal compensation, 106, 111, 114

operating principle, 113

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 139

Wiring options, 106

Thread measure, minimum, 12

Time monitoring, (See Causes of error and remedies)

Training center, 255

Index

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

274 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12

Transducers

connecting, 103

insulated, 104

non-insulated, 105

Transient recovery time, analog output module, 120

Type designations

Lines, harmonized standards, 30

Telecommunication cables and lines, 31

Types of protection, 47

Use

combined, 13

In industry, 253

in residential areas, 253

S7 Ex modules, 11

User data

HART analog input, 202, 243

HART analog module, 189, 229

HART analog output, 203, 244

Validity of the manual, 3

Voltage measurement

Measuring ranges, overview, 89

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 139

Watchdog, (See Causes of error and remedies)

Wire break, (See Causes of error and remedies)

Wire break check

SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 177, 217

SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 184, 224

Wire-break monitoring

SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 150

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 139

SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 156

Wiring

ET 200M, 20

S7-300, 18

Wiring diagram

SM 321; DI 4 x NAMUR, 55

SM 322; DO 4 x 15V/20 mA, 79

SM 322; DO 4 x 24V/10 mA, 67

SM 331; AI 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 178, 218

SM 331; AI 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 148

SM 331; AI 8 x TC/4 x RTD, 136

SM 332; AO 2 x 0/4...20mA HART, 185, 225

SM 332; AO 4 x 0/4...20 mA, 155

Index

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12 275

Index

S7-300, ET 200M Ex I/O Modules

276 Manual, 11/2015, A5E00172008-12